diff options
| author | Jakub Kicinski <jakub.kicinski@netronome.com> | 2018-12-03 17:43:28 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net> | 2018-12-05 11:30:06 -0800 |
| commit | b255e500c8dc111dd9efac1442a85a0dac913feb (patch) | |
| tree | 75a06d4683fdb40db30fe7a2bfafc80f6e522748 /Documentation/networking/device_drivers | |
| parent | a74f0fa082b76c6a76cba5672f36218518bfdc09 (diff) | |
| download | lwn-b255e500c8dc111dd9efac1442a85a0dac913feb.tar.gz lwn-b255e500c8dc111dd9efac1442a85a0dac913feb.zip | |
net: documentation: build a directory structure for drivers
Documentation/networking/ is full of cryptically named files with
driver documentation. This makes finding interesting information
at a glance really hard. Move all those files into a directory
called device_drivers (since not all drivers are for device) and
fix up references.
RFC v0.1 -> RFC v1:
- also add .txt suffix to the files which are missing it (Quentin)
Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <jakub.kicinski@netronome.com>
Reviewed-by: Quentin Monnet <quentin.monnet@netronome.com>
Acked-by: David Ahern <dsahern@gmail.com>
Acked-by: Henrik Austad <henrik@austad.us>
Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation/networking/device_drivers')
42 files changed, 10592 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/3c509.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/3c509.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fbf722e15ac3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/3c509.txt @@ -0,0 +1,213 @@ +Linux and the 3Com EtherLink III Series Ethercards (driver v1.18c and higher) +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +This file contains the instructions and caveats for v1.18c and higher versions +of the 3c509 driver. You should not use the driver without reading this file. + +release 1.0 +28 February 2002 +Current maintainer (corrections to): + David Ruggiero <jdr@farfalle.com> + +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +(0) Introduction + +The following are notes and information on using the 3Com EtherLink III series +ethercards in Linux. These cards are commonly known by the most widely-used +card's 3Com model number, 3c509. They are all 10mb/s ISA-bus cards and shouldn't +be (but sometimes are) confused with the similarly-numbered PCI-bus "3c905" +(aka "Vortex" or "Boomerang") series. Kernel support for the 3c509 family is +provided by the module 3c509.c, which has code to support all of the following +models: + + 3c509 (original ISA card) + 3c509B (later revision of the ISA card; supports full-duplex) + 3c589 (PCMCIA) + 3c589B (later revision of the 3c589; supports full-duplex) + 3c579 (EISA) + +Large portions of this documentation were heavily borrowed from the guide +written the original author of the 3c509 driver, Donald Becker. The master +copy of that document, which contains notes on older versions of the driver, +currently resides on Scyld web server: http://www.scyld.com/. + + +(1) Special Driver Features + +Overriding card settings + +The driver allows boot- or load-time overriding of the card's detected IOADDR, +IRQ, and transceiver settings, although this capability shouldn't generally be +needed except to enable full-duplex mode (see below). An example of the syntax +for LILO parameters for doing this: + + ether=10,0x310,3,0x3c509,eth0 + +This configures the first found 3c509 card for IRQ 10, base I/O 0x310, and +transceiver type 3 (10base2). The flag "0x3c509" must be set to avoid conflicts +with other card types when overriding the I/O address. When the driver is +loaded as a module, only the IRQ may be overridden. For example, +setting two cards to IRQ10 and IRQ11 is done by using the irq module +option: + + options 3c509 irq=10,11 + + +(2) Full-duplex mode + +The v1.18c driver added support for the 3c509B's full-duplex capabilities. +In order to enable and successfully use full-duplex mode, three conditions +must be met: + +(a) You must have a Etherlink III card model whose hardware supports full- +duplex operations. Currently, the only members of the 3c509 family that are +positively known to support full-duplex are the 3c509B (ISA bus) and 3c589B +(PCMCIA) cards. Cards without the "B" model designation do *not* support +full-duplex mode; these include the original 3c509 (no "B"), the original +3c589, the 3c529 (MCA bus), and the 3c579 (EISA bus). + +(b) You must be using your card's 10baseT transceiver (i.e., the RJ-45 +connector), not its AUI (thick-net) or 10base2 (thin-net/coax) interfaces. +AUI and 10base2 network cabling is physically incapable of full-duplex +operation. + +(c) Most importantly, your 3c509B must be connected to a link partner that is +itself full-duplex capable. This is almost certainly one of two things: a full- +duplex-capable Ethernet switch (*not* a hub), or a full-duplex-capable NIC on +another system that's connected directly to the 3c509B via a crossover cable. + +Full-duplex mode can be enabled using 'ethtool'. + +/////Extremely important caution concerning full-duplex mode///// +Understand that the 3c509B's hardware's full-duplex support is much more +limited than that provide by more modern network interface cards. Although +at the physical layer of the network it fully supports full-duplex operation, +the card was designed before the current Ethernet auto-negotiation (N-way) +spec was written. This means that the 3c509B family ***cannot and will not +auto-negotiate a full-duplex connection with its link partner under any +circumstances, no matter how it is initialized***. If the full-duplex mode +of the 3c509B is enabled, its link partner will very likely need to be +independently _forced_ into full-duplex mode as well; otherwise various nasty +failures will occur - at the very least, you'll see massive numbers of packet +collisions. This is one of very rare circumstances where disabling auto- +negotiation and forcing the duplex mode of a network interface card or switch +would ever be necessary or desirable. + + +(3) Available Transceiver Types + +For versions of the driver v1.18c and above, the available transceiver types are: + +0 transceiver type from EEPROM config (normally 10baseT); force half-duplex +1 AUI (thick-net / DB15 connector) +2 (undefined) +3 10base2 (thin-net == coax / BNC connector) +4 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force half-duplex mode +8 transceiver type and duplex mode taken from card's EEPROM config settings +12 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force full-duplex mode + +Prior to driver version 1.18c, only transceiver codes 0-4 were supported. Note +that the new transceiver codes 8 and 12 are the *only* ones that will enable +full-duplex mode, no matter what the card's detected EEPROM settings might be. +This insured that merely upgrading the driver from an earlier version would +never automatically enable full-duplex mode in an existing installation; +it must always be explicitly enabled via one of these code in order to be +activated. + +The transceiver type can be changed using 'ethtool'. + + +(4a) Interpretation of error messages and common problems + +Error Messages + +eth0: Infinite loop in interrupt, status 2011. +These are "mostly harmless" message indicating that the driver had too much +work during that interrupt cycle. With a status of 0x2011 you are receiving +packets faster than they can be removed from the card. This should be rare +or impossible in normal operation. Possible causes of this error report are: + + - a "green" mode enabled that slows the processor down when there is no + keyboard activity. + + - some other device or device driver hogging the bus or disabling interrupts. + Check /proc/interrupts for excessive interrupt counts. The timer tick + interrupt should always be incrementing faster than the others. + +No received packets +If a 3c509, 3c562 or 3c589 can successfully transmit packets, but never +receives packets (as reported by /proc/net/dev or 'ifconfig') you likely +have an interrupt line problem. Check /proc/interrupts to verify that the +card is actually generating interrupts. If the interrupt count is not +increasing you likely have a physical conflict with two devices trying to +use the same ISA IRQ line. The common conflict is with a sound card on IRQ10 +or IRQ5, and the easiest solution is to move the 3c509 to a different +interrupt line. If the device is receiving packets but 'ping' doesn't work, +you have a routing problem. + +Tx Carrier Errors Reported in /proc/net/dev +If an EtherLink III appears to transmit packets, but the "Tx carrier errors" +field in /proc/net/dev increments as quickly as the Tx packet count, you +likely have an unterminated network or the incorrect media transceiver selected. + +3c509B card is not detected on machines with an ISA PnP BIOS. +While the updated driver works with most PnP BIOS programs, it does not work +with all. This can be fixed by disabling PnP support using the 3Com-supplied +setup program. + +3c509 card is not detected on overclocked machines +Increase the delay time in id_read_eeprom() from the current value, 500, +to an absurdly high value, such as 5000. + + +(4b) Decoding Status and Error Messages + +The bits in the main status register are: + +value description +0x01 Interrupt latch +0x02 Tx overrun, or Rx underrun +0x04 Tx complete +0x08 Tx FIFO room available +0x10 A complete Rx packet has arrived +0x20 A Rx packet has started to arrive +0x40 The driver has requested an interrupt +0x80 Statistics counter nearly full + +The bits in the transmit (Tx) status word are: + +value description +0x02 Out-of-window collision. +0x04 Status stack overflow (normally impossible). +0x08 16 collisions. +0x10 Tx underrun (not enough PCI bus bandwidth). +0x20 Tx jabber. +0x40 Tx interrupt requested. +0x80 Status is valid (this should always be set). + + +When a transmit error occurs the driver produces a status message such as + + eth0: Transmit error, Tx status register 82 + +The two values typically seen here are: + +0x82 +Out of window collision. This typically occurs when some other Ethernet +host is incorrectly set to full duplex on a half duplex network. + +0x88 +16 collisions. This typically occurs when the network is exceptionally busy +or when another host doesn't correctly back off after a collision. If this +error is mixed with 0x82 errors it is the result of a host incorrectly set +to full duplex (see above). + +Both of these errors are the result of network problems that should be +corrected. They do not represent driver malfunction. + + +(5) Revision history (this file) + +28Feb02 v1.0 DR New; major portions based on Becker original 3c509 docs + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/vortex.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/vortex.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..587f3fcfbcae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/vortex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,448 @@ +Documentation/networking/device_drivers/3com/vortex.txt +Andrew Morton +30 April 2000 + + +This document describes the usage and errata of the 3Com "Vortex" device +driver for Linux, 3c59x.c. + +The driver was written by Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com> + +Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver. +Please report problems to one or more of: + + Andrew Morton + Netdev mailing list <netdev@vger.kernel.org> + Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org> + +Please note the 'Reporting and Diagnosing Problems' section at the end +of this file. + + +Since kernel 2.3.99-pre6, this driver incorporates the support for the +3c575-series Cardbus cards which used to be handled by 3c575_cb.c. + +This driver supports the following hardware: + + 3c590 Vortex 10Mbps + 3c592 EISA 10Mbps Demon/Vortex + 3c597 EISA Fast Demon/Vortex + 3c595 Vortex 100baseTx + 3c595 Vortex 100baseT4 + 3c595 Vortex 100base-MII + 3c900 Boomerang 10baseT + 3c900 Boomerang 10Mbps Combo + 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPO + 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps Combo + 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPC + 3c900B-FL Cyclone 10base-FL + 3c905 Boomerang 100baseTx + 3c905 Boomerang 100baseT4 + 3c905B Cyclone 100baseTx + 3c905B Cyclone 10/100/BNC + 3c905B-FX Cyclone 100baseFx + 3c905C Tornado + 3c920B-EMB-WNM (ATI Radeon 9100 IGP) + 3c980 Cyclone + 3c980C Python-T + 3cSOHO100-TX Hurricane + 3c555 Laptop Hurricane + 3c556 Laptop Tornado + 3c556B Laptop Hurricane + 3c575 [Megahertz] 10/100 LAN CardBus + 3c575 Boomerang CardBus + 3CCFE575BT Cyclone CardBus + 3CCFE575CT Tornado CardBus + 3CCFE656 Cyclone CardBus + 3CCFEM656B Cyclone+Winmodem CardBus + 3CXFEM656C Tornado+Winmodem CardBus + 3c450 HomePNA Tornado + 3c920 Tornado + 3c982 Hydra Dual Port A + 3c982 Hydra Dual Port B + 3c905B-T4 + 3c920B-EMB-WNM Tornado + +Module parameters +================= + +There are several parameters which may be provided to the driver when +its module is loaded. These are usually placed in /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf +configuration files. Example: + +options 3c59x debug=3 rx_copybreak=300 + +If you are using the PCMCIA tools (cardmgr) then the options may be +placed in /etc/pcmcia/config.opts: + +module "3c59x" opts "debug=3 rx_copybreak=300" + + +The supported parameters are: + +debug=N + + Where N is a number from 0 to 7. Anything above 3 produces a lot + of output in your system logs. debug=1 is default. + +options=N1,N2,N3,... + + Each number in the list provides an option to the corresponding + network card. So if you have two 3c905's and you wish to provide + them with option 0x204 you would use: + + options=0x204,0x204 + + The individual options are composed of a number of bitfields which + have the following meanings: + + Possible media type settings + 0 10baseT + 1 10Mbs AUI + 2 undefined + 3 10base2 (BNC) + 4 100base-TX + 5 100base-FX + 6 MII (Media Independent Interface) + 7 Use default setting from EEPROM + 8 Autonegotiate + 9 External MII + 10 Use default setting from EEPROM + + When generating a value for the 'options' setting, the above media + selection values may be OR'ed (or added to) the following: + + 0x8000 Set driver debugging level to 7 + 0x4000 Set driver debugging level to 2 + 0x0400 Enable Wake-on-LAN + 0x0200 Force full duplex mode. + 0x0010 Bus-master enable bit (Old Vortex cards only) + + For example: + + insmod 3c59x options=0x204 + + will force full-duplex 100base-TX, rather than allowing the usual + autonegotiation. + +global_options=N + + Sets the `options' parameter for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. + Entries in the `options' array above will override any setting of + this. + +full_duplex=N1,N2,N3... + + Similar to bit 9 of 'options'. Forces the corresponding card into + full-duplex mode. Please use this in preference to the `options' + parameter. + + In fact, please don't use this at all! You're better off getting + autonegotiation working properly. + +global_full_duplex=N1 + + Sets full duplex mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries + in the `full_duplex' array above will override any setting of this. + +flow_ctrl=N1,N2,N3... + + Use 802.3x MAC-layer flow control. The 3com cards only support the + PAUSE command, which means that they will stop sending packets for a + short period if they receive a PAUSE frame from the link partner. + + The driver only allows flow control on a link which is operating in + full duplex mode. + + This feature does not appear to work on the 3c905 - only 3c905B and + 3c905C have been tested. + + The 3com cards appear to only respond to PAUSE frames which are + sent to the reserved destination address of 01:80:c2:00:00:01. They + do not honour PAUSE frames which are sent to the station MAC address. + +rx_copybreak=M + + The driver preallocates 32 full-sized (1536 byte) network buffers + for receiving. When a packet arrives, the driver has to decide + whether to leave the packet in its full-sized buffer, or to allocate + a smaller buffer and copy the packet across into it. + + This is a speed/space tradeoff. + + The value of rx_copybreak is used to decide when to make the copy. + If the packet size is less than rx_copybreak, the packet is copied. + The default value for rx_copybreak is 200 bytes. + +max_interrupt_work=N + + The driver's interrupt service routine can handle many receive and + transmit packets in a single invocation. It does this in a loop. + The value of max_interrupt_work governs how many times the interrupt + service routine will loop. The default value is 32 loops. If this + is exceeded the interrupt service routine gives up and generates a + warning message "eth0: Too much work in interrupt". + +hw_checksums=N1,N2,N3,... + + Recent 3com NICs are able to generate IPv4, TCP and UDP checksums + in hardware. Linux has used the Rx checksumming for a long time. + The "zero copy" patch which is planned for the 2.4 kernel series + allows you to make use of the NIC's DMA scatter/gather and transmit + checksumming as well. + + The driver is set up so that, when the zerocopy patch is applied, + all Tornado and Cyclone devices will use S/G and Tx checksums. + + This module parameter has been provided so you can override this + decision. If you think that Tx checksums are causing a problem, you + may disable the feature with `hw_checksums=0'. + + If you think your NIC should be performing Tx checksumming and the + driver isn't enabling it, you can force the use of hardware Tx + checksumming with `hw_checksums=1'. + + The driver drops a message in the logfiles to indicate whether or + not it is using hardware scatter/gather and hardware Tx checksums. + + Scatter/gather and hardware checksums provide considerable + performance improvement for the sendfile() system call, but a small + decrease in throughput for send(). There is no effect upon receive + efficiency. + +compaq_ioaddr=N +compaq_irq=N +compaq_device_id=N + + "Variables to work-around the Compaq PCI BIOS32 problem".... + +watchdog=N + + Sets the time duration (in milliseconds) after which the kernel + decides that the transmitter has become stuck and needs to be reset. + This is mainly for debugging purposes, although it may be advantageous + to increase this value on LANs which have very high collision rates. + The default value is 5000 (5.0 seconds). + +enable_wol=N1,N2,N3,... + + Enable Wake-on-LAN support for the relevant interface. Donald + Becker's `ether-wake' application may be used to wake suspended + machines. + + Also enables the NIC's power management support. + +global_enable_wol=N + + Sets enable_wol mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries in + the `enable_wol' array above will override any setting of this. + +Media selection +--------------- + +A number of the older NICs such as the 3c590 and 3c900 series have +10base2 and AUI interfaces. + +Prior to January, 2001 this driver would autoeselect the 10base2 or AUI +port if it didn't detect activity on the 10baseT port. It would then +get stuck on the 10base2 port and a driver reload was necessary to +switch back to 10baseT. This behaviour could not be prevented with a +module option override. + +Later (current) versions of the driver _do_ support locking of the +media type. So if you load the driver module with + + modprobe 3c59x options=0 + +it will permanently select the 10baseT port. Automatic selection of +other media types does not occur. + + +Transmit error, Tx status register 82 +------------------------------------- + +This is a common error which is almost always caused by another host on +the same network being in full-duplex mode, while this host is in +half-duplex mode. You need to find that other host and make it run in +half-duplex mode or fix this host to run in full-duplex mode. + +As a last resort, you can force the 3c59x driver into full-duplex mode +with + + options 3c59x full_duplex=1 + +but this has to be viewed as a workaround for broken network gear and +should only really be used for equipment which cannot autonegotiate. + + +Additional resources +-------------------- + +Details of the device driver implementation are at the top of the source file. + +Additional documentation is available at Don Becker's Linux Drivers site: + + http://www.scyld.com/vortex.html + +Donald Becker's driver development site: + + http://www.scyld.com/network.html + +Donald's vortex-diag program is useful for inspecting the NIC's state: + + http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html + +Donald's mii-diag program may be used for inspecting and manipulating +the NIC's Media Independent Interface subsystem: + + http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html#mii-diag + +Donald's wake-on-LAN page: + + http://www.scyld.com/wakeonlan.html + +3Com's DOS-based application for setting up the NICs EEPROMs: + + ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe + + +Autonegotiation notes +--------------------- + + The driver uses a one-minute heartbeat for adapting to changes in + the external LAN environment if link is up and 5 seconds if link is down. + This means that when, for example, a machine is unplugged from a hubbed + 10baseT LAN plugged into a switched 100baseT LAN, the throughput + will be quite dreadful for up to sixty seconds. Be patient. + + Cisco interoperability note from Walter Wong <wcw+@CMU.EDU>: + + On a side note, adding HAS_NWAY seems to share a problem with the + Cisco 6509 switch. Specifically, you need to change the spanning + tree parameter for the port the machine is plugged into to 'portfast' + mode. Otherwise, the negotiation fails. This has been an issue + we've noticed for a while but haven't had the time to track down. + + Cisco switches (Jeff Busch <jbusch@deja.com>) + + My "standard config" for ports to which PC's/servers connect directly: + + interface FastEthernet0/N + description machinename + load-interval 30 + spanning-tree portfast + + If autonegotiation is a problem, you may need to specify "speed + 100" and "duplex full" as well (or "speed 10" and "duplex half"). + + WARNING: DO NOT hook up hubs/switches/bridges to these + specially-configured ports! The switch will become very confused. + + +Reporting and diagnosing problems +--------------------------------- + +Maintainers find that accurate and complete problem reports are +invaluable in resolving driver problems. We are frequently not able to +reproduce problems and must rely on your patience and efforts to get to +the bottom of the problem. + +If you believe you have a driver problem here are some of the +steps you should take: + +- Is it really a driver problem? + + Eliminate some variables: try different cards, different + computers, different cables, different ports on the switch/hub, + different versions of the kernel or of the driver, etc. + +- OK, it's a driver problem. + + You need to generate a report. Typically this is an email to the + maintainer and/or netdev@vger.kernel.org. The maintainer's + email address will be in the driver source or in the MAINTAINERS file. + +- The contents of your report will vary a lot depending upon the + problem. If it's a kernel crash then you should refer to the + admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst file. + + But for most problems it is useful to provide the following: + + o Kernel version, driver version + + o A copy of the banner message which the driver generates when + it is initialised. For example: + + eth0: 3Com PCI 3c905C Tornado at 0xa400, 00:50:da:6a:88:f0, IRQ 19 + 8K byte-wide RAM 5:3 Rx:Tx split, autoselect/Autonegotiate interface. + MII transceiver found at address 24, status 782d. + Enabling bus-master transmits and whole-frame receives. + + NOTE: You must provide the `debug=2' modprobe option to generate + a full detection message. Please do this: + + modprobe 3c59x debug=2 + + o If it is a PCI device, the relevant output from 'lspci -vx', eg: + + 00:09.0 Ethernet controller: 3Com Corporation 3c905C-TX [Fast Etherlink] (rev 74) + Subsystem: 3Com Corporation: Unknown device 9200 + Flags: bus master, medium devsel, latency 32, IRQ 19 + I/O ports at a400 [size=128] + Memory at db000000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=128] + Expansion ROM at <unassigned> [disabled] [size=128K] + Capabilities: [dc] Power Management version 2 + 00: b7 10 00 92 07 00 10 02 74 00 00 02 08 20 00 00 + 10: 01 a4 00 00 00 00 00 db 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 + 20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 b7 10 00 10 + 30: 00 00 00 00 dc 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 01 0a 0a + + o A description of the environment: 10baseT? 100baseT? + full/half duplex? switched or hubbed? + + o Any additional module parameters which you may be providing to the driver. + + o Any kernel logs which are produced. The more the merrier. + If this is a large file and you are sending your report to a + mailing list, mention that you have the logfile, but don't send + it. If you're reporting direct to the maintainer then just send + it. + + To ensure that all kernel logs are available, add the + following line to /etc/syslog.conf: + + kern.* /var/log/messages + + Then restart syslogd with: + + /etc/rc.d/init.d/syslog restart + + (The above may vary, depending upon which Linux distribution you use). + + o If your problem is reproducible then that's great. Try the + following: + + 1) Increase the debug level. Usually this is done via: + + a) modprobe driver debug=7 + b) In /etc/modprobe.d/driver.conf: + options driver debug=7 + + 2) Recreate the problem with the higher debug level, + send all logs to the maintainer. + + 3) Download you card's diagnostic tool from Donald + Becker's website <http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html>. + Download mii-diag.c as well. Build these. + + a) Run 'vortex-diag -aaee' and 'mii-diag -v' when the card is + working correctly. Save the output. + + b) Run the above commands when the card is malfunctioning. Send + both sets of output. + +Finally, please be patient and be prepared to do some work. You may +end up working on this problem for a week or more as the maintainer +asks more questions, asks for more tests, asks for patches to be +applied, etc. At the end of it all, the problem may even remain +unresolved. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/amazon/ena.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/amazon/ena.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2b4b6f57e549 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/amazon/ena.txt @@ -0,0 +1,305 @@ +Linux kernel driver for Elastic Network Adapter (ENA) family: +============================================================= + +Overview: +========= +ENA is a networking interface designed to make good use of modern CPU +features and system architectures. + +The ENA device exposes a lightweight management interface with a +minimal set of memory mapped registers and extendable command set +through an Admin Queue. + +The driver supports a range of ENA devices, is link-speed independent +(i.e., the same driver is used for 10GbE, 25GbE, 40GbE, etc.), and has +a negotiated and extendable feature set. + +Some ENA devices support SR-IOV. This driver is used for both the +SR-IOV Physical Function (PF) and Virtual Function (VF) devices. + +ENA devices enable high speed and low overhead network traffic +processing by providing multiple Tx/Rx queue pairs (the maximum number +is advertised by the device via the Admin Queue), a dedicated MSI-X +interrupt vector per Tx/Rx queue pair, adaptive interrupt moderation, +and CPU cacheline optimized data placement. + +The ENA driver supports industry standard TCP/IP offload features such +as checksum offload and TCP transmit segmentation offload (TSO). +Receive-side scaling (RSS) is supported for multi-core scaling. + +The ENA driver and its corresponding devices implement health +monitoring mechanisms such as watchdog, enabling the device and driver +to recover in a manner transparent to the application, as well as +debug logs. + +Some of the ENA devices support a working mode called Low-latency +Queue (LLQ), which saves several more microseconds. + +Supported PCI vendor ID/device IDs: +=================================== +1d0f:0ec2 - ENA PF +1d0f:1ec2 - ENA PF with LLQ support +1d0f:ec20 - ENA VF +1d0f:ec21 - ENA VF with LLQ support + +ENA Source Code Directory Structure: +==================================== +ena_com.[ch] - Management communication layer. This layer is + responsible for the handling all the management + (admin) communication between the device and the + driver. +ena_eth_com.[ch] - Tx/Rx data path. +ena_admin_defs.h - Definition of ENA management interface. +ena_eth_io_defs.h - Definition of ENA data path interface. +ena_common_defs.h - Common definitions for ena_com layer. +ena_regs_defs.h - Definition of ENA PCI memory-mapped (MMIO) registers. +ena_netdev.[ch] - Main Linux kernel driver. +ena_syfsfs.[ch] - Sysfs files. +ena_ethtool.c - ethtool callbacks. +ena_pci_id_tbl.h - Supported device IDs. + +Management Interface: +===================== +ENA management interface is exposed by means of: +- PCIe Configuration Space +- Device Registers +- Admin Queue (AQ) and Admin Completion Queue (ACQ) +- Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ) + +ENA device MMIO Registers are accessed only during driver +initialization and are not involved in further normal device +operation. + +AQ is used for submitting management commands, and the +results/responses are reported asynchronously through ACQ. + +ENA introduces a very small set of management commands with room for +vendor-specific extensions. Most of the management operations are +framed in a generic Get/Set feature command. + +The following admin queue commands are supported: +- Create I/O submission queue +- Create I/O completion queue +- Destroy I/O submission queue +- Destroy I/O completion queue +- Get feature +- Set feature +- Configure AENQ +- Get statistics + +Refer to ena_admin_defs.h for the list of supported Get/Set Feature +properties. + +The Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ) is a uni-directional +queue used by the ENA device to send to the driver events that cannot +be reported using ACQ. AENQ events are subdivided into groups. Each +group may have multiple syndromes, as shown below + +The events are: + Group Syndrome + Link state change - X - + Fatal error - X - + Notification Suspend traffic + Notification Resume traffic + Keep-Alive - X - + +ACQ and AENQ share the same MSI-X vector. + +Keep-Alive is a special mechanism that allows monitoring of the +device's health. The driver maintains a watchdog (WD) handler which, +if fired, logs the current state and statistics then resets and +restarts the ENA device and driver. A Keep-Alive event is delivered by +the device every second. The driver re-arms the WD upon reception of a +Keep-Alive event. A missed Keep-Alive event causes the WD handler to +fire. + +Data Path Interface: +==================== +I/O operations are based on Tx and Rx Submission Queues (Tx SQ and Rx +SQ correspondingly). Each SQ has a completion queue (CQ) associated +with it. + +The SQs and CQs are implemented as descriptor rings in contiguous +physical memory. + +The ENA driver supports two Queue Operation modes for Tx SQs: +- Regular mode + * In this mode the Tx SQs reside in the host's memory. The ENA + device fetches the ENA Tx descriptors and packet data from host + memory. +- Low Latency Queue (LLQ) mode or "push-mode". + * In this mode the driver pushes the transmit descriptors and the + first 128 bytes of the packet directly to the ENA device memory + space. The rest of the packet payload is fetched by the + device. For this operation mode, the driver uses a dedicated PCI + device memory BAR, which is mapped with write-combine capability. + +The Rx SQs support only the regular mode. + +Note: Not all ENA devices support LLQ, and this feature is negotiated + with the device upon initialization. If the ENA device does not + support LLQ mode, the driver falls back to the regular mode. + +The driver supports multi-queue for both Tx and Rx. This has various +benefits: +- Reduced CPU/thread/process contention on a given Ethernet interface. +- Cache miss rate on completion is reduced, particularly for data + cache lines that hold the sk_buff structures. +- Increased process-level parallelism when handling received packets. +- Increased data cache hit rate, by steering kernel processing of + packets to the CPU, where the application thread consuming the + packet is running. +- In hardware interrupt re-direction. + +Interrupt Modes: +================ +The driver assigns a single MSI-X vector per queue pair (for both Tx +and Rx directions). The driver assigns an additional dedicated MSI-X vector +for management (for ACQ and AENQ). + +Management interrupt registration is performed when the Linux kernel +probes the adapter, and it is de-registered when the adapter is +removed. I/O queue interrupt registration is performed when the Linux +interface of the adapter is opened, and it is de-registered when the +interface is closed. + +The management interrupt is named: + ena-mgmnt@pci:<PCI domain:bus:slot.function> +and for each queue pair, an interrupt is named: + <interface name>-Tx-Rx-<queue index> + +The ENA device operates in auto-mask and auto-clear interrupt +modes. That is, once MSI-X is delivered to the host, its Cause bit is +automatically cleared and the interrupt is masked. The interrupt is +unmasked by the driver after NAPI processing is complete. + +Interrupt Moderation: +===================== +ENA driver and device can operate in conventional or adaptive interrupt +moderation mode. + +In conventional mode the driver instructs device to postpone interrupt +posting according to static interrupt delay value. The interrupt delay +value can be configured through ethtool(8). The following ethtool +parameters are supported by the driver: tx-usecs, rx-usecs + +In adaptive interrupt moderation mode the interrupt delay value is +updated by the driver dynamically and adjusted every NAPI cycle +according to the traffic nature. + +By default ENA driver applies adaptive coalescing on Rx traffic and +conventional coalescing on Tx traffic. + +Adaptive coalescing can be switched on/off through ethtool(8) +adaptive_rx on|off parameter. + +The driver chooses interrupt delay value according to the number of +bytes and packets received between interrupt unmasking and interrupt +posting. The driver uses interrupt delay table that subdivides the +range of received bytes/packets into 5 levels and assigns interrupt +delay value to each level. + +The user can enable/disable adaptive moderation, modify the interrupt +delay table and restore its default values through sysfs. + +The rx_copybreak is initialized by default to ENA_DEFAULT_RX_COPYBREAK +and can be configured by the ETHTOOL_STUNABLE command of the +SIOCETHTOOL ioctl. + +SKB: +The driver-allocated SKB for frames received from Rx handling using +NAPI context. The allocation method depends on the size of the packet. +If the frame length is larger than rx_copybreak, napi_get_frags() +is used, otherwise netdev_alloc_skb_ip_align() is used, the buffer +content is copied (by CPU) to the SKB, and the buffer is recycled. + +Statistics: +=========== +The user can obtain ENA device and driver statistics using ethtool. +The driver can collect regular or extended statistics (including +per-queue stats) from the device. + +In addition the driver logs the stats to syslog upon device reset. + +MTU: +==== +The driver supports an arbitrarily large MTU with a maximum that is +negotiated with the device. The driver configures MTU using the +SetFeature command (ENA_ADMIN_MTU property). The user can change MTU +via ip(8) and similar legacy tools. + +Stateless Offloads: +=================== +The ENA driver supports: +- TSO over IPv4/IPv6 +- TSO with ECN +- IPv4 header checksum offload +- TCP/UDP over IPv4/IPv6 checksum offloads + +RSS: +==== +- The ENA device supports RSS that allows flexible Rx traffic + steering. +- Toeplitz and CRC32 hash functions are supported. +- Different combinations of L2/L3/L4 fields can be configured as + inputs for hash functions. +- The driver configures RSS settings using the AQ SetFeature command + (ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_FUNCTION, ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_INPUT and + ENA_ADMIN_RSS_REDIRECTION_TABLE_CONFIG properties). +- If the NETIF_F_RXHASH flag is set, the 32-bit result of the hash + function delivered in the Rx CQ descriptor is set in the received + SKB. +- The user can provide a hash key, hash function, and configure the + indirection table through ethtool(8). + +DATA PATH: +========== +Tx: +--- +end_start_xmit() is called by the stack. This function does the following: +- Maps data buffers (skb->data and frags). +- Populates ena_buf for the push buffer (if the driver and device are + in push mode.) +- Prepares ENA bufs for the remaining frags. +- Allocates a new request ID from the empty req_id ring. The request + ID is the index of the packet in the Tx info. This is used for + out-of-order TX completions. +- Adds the packet to the proper place in the Tx ring. +- Calls ena_com_prepare_tx(), an ENA communication layer that converts + the ena_bufs to ENA descriptors (and adds meta ENA descriptors as + needed.) + * This function also copies the ENA descriptors and the push buffer + to the Device memory space (if in push mode.) +- Writes doorbell to the ENA device. +- When the ENA device finishes sending the packet, a completion + interrupt is raised. +- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI. +- The ena_clean_tx_irq() function is called. This function handles the + completion descriptors generated by the ENA, with a single + completion descriptor per completed packet. + * req_id is retrieved from the completion descriptor. The tx_info of + the packet is retrieved via the req_id. The data buffers are + unmapped and req_id is returned to the empty req_id ring. + * The function stops when the completion descriptors are completed or + the budget is reached. + +Rx: +--- +- When a packet is received from the ENA device. +- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI. +- The ena_clean_rx_irq() function is called. This function calls + ena_rx_pkt(), an ENA communication layer function, which returns the + number of descriptors used for a new unhandled packet, and zero if + no new packet is found. +- Then it calls the ena_clean_rx_irq() function. +- ena_eth_rx_skb() checks packet length: + * If the packet is small (len < rx_copybreak), the driver allocates + a SKB for the new packet, and copies the packet payload into the + SKB data buffer. + - In this way the original data buffer is not passed to the stack + and is reused for future Rx packets. + * Otherwise the function unmaps the Rx buffer, then allocates the + new SKB structure and hooks the Rx buffer to the SKB frags. +- The new SKB is updated with the necessary information (protocol, + checksum hw verify result, etc.), and then passed to the network + stack, using the NAPI interface function napi_gro_receive(). diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/chelsio/cxgb.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/chelsio/cxgb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..20a887615c4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/chelsio/cxgb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,352 @@ + Chelsio N210 10Gb Ethernet Network Controller + + Driver Release Notes for Linux + + Version 2.1.1 + + June 20, 2005 + +CONTENTS +======== + INTRODUCTION + FEATURES + PERFORMANCE + DRIVER MESSAGES + KNOWN ISSUES + SUPPORT + + +INTRODUCTION +============ + + This document describes the Linux driver for Chelsio 10Gb Ethernet Network + Controller. This driver supports the Chelsio N210 NIC and is backward + compatible with the Chelsio N110 model 10Gb NICs. + + +FEATURES +======== + + Adaptive Interrupts (adaptive-rx) + --------------------------------- + + This feature provides an adaptive algorithm that adjusts the interrupt + coalescing parameters, allowing the driver to dynamically adapt the latency + settings to achieve the highest performance during various types of network + load. + + The interface used to control this feature is ethtool. Please see the + ethtool manpage for additional usage information. + + By default, adaptive-rx is disabled. + To enable adaptive-rx: + + ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx on + + To disable adaptive-rx, use ethtool: + + ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off + + After disabling adaptive-rx, the timer latency value will be set to 50us. + You may set the timer latency after disabling adaptive-rx: + + ethtool -C <interface> rx-usecs <microseconds> + + An example to set the timer latency value to 100us on eth0: + + ethtool -C eth0 rx-usecs 100 + + You may also provide a timer latency value while disabling adaptive-rx: + + ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off rx-usecs <microseconds> + + If adaptive-rx is disabled and a timer latency value is specified, the timer + will be set to the specified value until changed by the user or until + adaptive-rx is enabled. + + To view the status of the adaptive-rx and timer latency values: + + ethtool -c <interface> + + + TCP Segmentation Offloading (TSO) Support + ----------------------------------------- + + This feature, also known as "large send", enables a system's protocol stack + to offload portions of outbound TCP processing to a network interface card + thereby reducing system CPU utilization and enhancing performance. + + The interface used to control this feature is ethtool version 1.8 or higher. + Please see the ethtool manpage for additional usage information. + + By default, TSO is enabled. + To disable TSO: + + ethtool -K <interface> tso off + + To enable TSO: + + ethtool -K <interface> tso on + + To view the status of TSO: + + ethtool -k <interface> + + +PERFORMANCE +=========== + + The following information is provided as an example of how to change system + parameters for "performance tuning" an what value to use. You may or may not + want to change these system parameters, depending on your server/workstation + application. Doing so is not warranted in any way by Chelsio Communications, + and is done at "YOUR OWN RISK". Chelsio will not be held responsible for loss + of data or damage to equipment. + + Your distribution may have a different way of doing things, or you may prefer + a different method. These commands are shown only to provide an example of + what to do and are by no means definitive. + + Making any of the following system changes will only last until you reboot + your system. You may want to write a script that runs at boot-up which + includes the optimal settings for your system. + + Setting PCI Latency Timer: + setpci -d 1425:* 0x0c.l=0x0000F800 + + Disabling TCP timestamp: + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps=0 + + Disabling SACK: + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_sack=0 + + Setting large number of incoming connection requests: + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_max_syn_backlog=3000 + + Setting maximum receive socket buffer size: + sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=1024000 + + Setting maximum send socket buffer size: + sysctl -w net.core.wmem_max=1024000 + + Set smp_affinity (on a multiprocessor system) to a single CPU: + echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity + + Setting default receive socket buffer size: + sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=524287 + + Setting default send socket buffer size: + sysctl -w net.core.wmem_default=524287 + + Setting maximum option memory buffers: + sysctl -w net.core.optmem_max=524287 + + Setting maximum backlog (# of unprocessed packets before kernel drops): + sysctl -w net.core.netdev_max_backlog=300000 + + Setting TCP read buffers (min/default/max): + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" + + Setting TCP write buffers (min/pressure/max): + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" + + Setting TCP buffer space (min/pressure/max): + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_mem="10000000 10000000 10000000" + + TCP window size for single connections: + The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size must be at least as large as the + Bandwidth-Delay Product of the communication link between the sender and + receiver. Due to the variations of RTT, you may want to increase the buffer + size up to 2 times the Bandwidth-Delay Product. Reference page 289 of + "TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 1, The Protocols" by W. Richard Stevens. + At 10Gb speeds, use the following formula: + RX_WINDOW >= 1.25MBytes * RTT(in milliseconds) + Example for RTT with 100us: RX_WINDOW = (1,250,000 * 0.1) = 125,000 + RX_WINDOW sizes of 256KB - 512KB should be sufficient. + Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size: + sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="<min> <default> <max>" + + TCP window size for multiple connections: + The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size may be calculated the same as single + connections, but should be divided by the number of connections. The + smaller window prevents congestion and facilitates better pacing, + especially if/when MAC level flow control does not work well or when it is + not supported on the machine. Experimentation may be necessary to attain + the correct value. This method is provided as a starting point for the + correct receive buffer size. + Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size is + performed in the same manner as single connection. + + +DRIVER MESSAGES +=============== + + The following messages are the most common messages logged by syslog. These + may be found in /var/log/messages. + + Driver up: + Chelsio Network Driver - version 2.1.1 + + NIC detected: + eth#: Chelsio N210 1x10GBaseX NIC (rev #), PCIX 133MHz/64-bit + + Link up: + eth#: link is up at 10 Gbps, full duplex + + Link down: + eth#: link is down + + +KNOWN ISSUES +============ + + These issues have been identified during testing. The following information + is provided as a workaround to the problem. In some cases, this problem is + inherent to Linux or to a particular Linux Distribution and/or hardware + platform. + + 1. Large number of TCP retransmits on a multiprocessor (SMP) system. + + On a system with multiple CPUs, the interrupt (IRQ) for the network + controller may be bound to more than one CPU. This will cause TCP + retransmits if the packet data were to be split across different CPUs + and re-assembled in a different order than expected. + + To eliminate the TCP retransmits, set smp_affinity on the particular + interrupt to a single CPU. You can locate the interrupt (IRQ) used on + the N110/N210 by using ifconfig: + ifconfig <dev_name> | grep Interrupt + Set the smp_affinity to a single CPU: + echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity + + It is highly suggested that you do not run the irqbalance daemon on your + system, as this will change any smp_affinity setting you have applied. + The irqbalance daemon runs on a 10 second interval and binds interrupts + to the least loaded CPU determined by the daemon. To disable this daemon: + chkconfig --level 2345 irqbalance off + + By default, some Linux distributions enable the kernel feature, + irqbalance, which performs the same function as the daemon. To disable + this feature, add the following line to your bootloader: + noirqbalance + + Example using the Grub bootloader: + title Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (2.4.21-27.ELsmp) + root (hd0,0) + kernel /vmlinuz-2.4.21-27.ELsmp ro root=/dev/hda3 noirqbalance + initrd /initrd-2.4.21-27.ELsmp.img + + 2. After running insmod, the driver is loaded and the incorrect network + interface is brought up without running ifup. + + When using 2.4.x kernels, including RHEL kernels, the Linux kernel + invokes a script named "hotplug". This script is primarily used to + automatically bring up USB devices when they are plugged in, however, + the script also attempts to automatically bring up a network interface + after loading the kernel module. The hotplug script does this by scanning + the ifcfg-eth# config files in /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts, looking + for HWADDR=<mac_address>. + + If the hotplug script does not find the HWADDRR within any of the + ifcfg-eth# files, it will bring up the device with the next available + interface name. If this interface is already configured for a different + network card, your new interface will have incorrect IP address and + network settings. + + To solve this issue, you can add the HWADDR=<mac_address> key to the + interface config file of your network controller. + + To disable this "hotplug" feature, you may add the driver (module name) + to the "blacklist" file located in /etc/hotplug. It has been noted that + this does not work for network devices because the net.agent script + does not use the blacklist file. Simply remove, or rename, the net.agent + script located in /etc/hotplug to disable this feature. + + 3. Transport Protocol (TP) hangs when running heavy multi-connection traffic + on an AMD Opteron system with HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel chipset. + + If your AMD Opteron system uses the AMD-8131 HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel + chipset, you may experience the "133-Mhz Mode Split Completion Data + Corruption" bug identified by AMD while using a 133Mhz PCI-X card on the + bus PCI-X bus. + + AMD states, "Under highly specific conditions, the AMD-8131 PCI-X Tunnel + can provide stale data via split completion cycles to a PCI-X card that + is operating at 133 Mhz", causing data corruption. + + AMD's provides three workarounds for this problem, however, Chelsio + recommends the first option for best performance with this bug: + + For 133Mhz secondary bus operation, limit the transaction length and + the number of outstanding transactions, via BIOS configuration + programming of the PCI-X card, to the following: + + Data Length (bytes): 1k + Total allowed outstanding transactions: 2 + + Please refer to AMD 8131-HT/PCI-X Errata 26310 Rev 3.08 August 2004, + section 56, "133-MHz Mode Split Completion Data Corruption" for more + details with this bug and workarounds suggested by AMD. + + It may be possible to work outside AMD's recommended PCI-X settings, try + increasing the Data Length to 2k bytes for increased performance. If you + have issues with these settings, please revert to the "safe" settings + and duplicate the problem before submitting a bug or asking for support. + + NOTE: The default setting on most systems is 8 outstanding transactions + and 2k bytes data length. + + 4. On multiprocessor systems, it has been noted that an application which + is handling 10Gb networking can switch between CPUs causing degraded + and/or unstable performance. + + If running on an SMP system and taking performance measurements, it + is suggested you either run the latest netperf-2.4.0+ or use a binding + tool such as Tim Hockin's procstate utilities (runon) + <http://www.hockin.org/~thockin/procstate/>. + + Binding netserver and netperf (or other applications) to particular + CPUs will have a significant difference in performance measurements. + You may need to experiment which CPU to bind the application to in + order to achieve the best performance for your system. + + If you are developing an application designed for 10Gb networking, + please keep in mind you may want to look at kernel functions + sched_setaffinity & sched_getaffinity to bind your application. + + If you are just running user-space applications such as ftp, telnet, + etc., you may want to try the runon tool provided by Tim Hockin's + procstate utility. You could also try binding the interface to a + particular CPU: runon 0 ifup eth0 + + +SUPPORT +======= + + If you have problems with the software or hardware, please contact our + customer support team via email at support@chelsio.com or check our website + at http://www.chelsio.com + +=============================================================================== + + Chelsio Communications + 370 San Aleso Ave. + Suite 100 + Sunnyvale, CA 94085 + http://www.chelsio.com + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as +published by the Free Software Foundation. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along +with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., +59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED +WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + + Copyright (c) 2003-2005 Chelsio Communications. All rights reserved. + +=============================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cirrus/cs89x0.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cirrus/cs89x0.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0e190180eec8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cirrus/cs89x0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,624 @@ + +NOTE +---- + +This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version +has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton. + +Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as +described below. In general, you should use the driver version which +comes with your Linux distribution. + + + +CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS +Linux Network Interface Driver ver. 2.00 <kernel 2.3.48> +=============================================================================== + + +TABLE OF CONTENTS + +1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS + 1.1 Product Overview + 1.2 Driver Description + 1.2.1 Driver Name + 1.2.2 File in the Driver Package + 1.3 System Requirements + 1.4 Licensing Information + +2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION + 2.1 CS8900-based Adapter Configuration + 2.2 CS8920-based Adapter Configuration + +3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE + +4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER + 4.1 Compiling the Driver as a Loadable Module + 4.2 Compiling the driver to support memory mode + 4.3 Compiling the driver to support Rx DMA + +5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING + 5.1 Known Defects and Limitations + 5.2 Testing the Adapter + 5.2.1 Diagnostic Self-Test + 5.2.2 Diagnostic Network Test + 5.3 Using the Adapter's LEDs + 5.4 Resolving I/O Conflicts + +6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT + 6.1 Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support + 6.2 Information Required Before Contacting Technical Support + 6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version + 6.4 Current maintainer + 6.5 Kernel boot parameters + + +1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS +=============================================================================== + + +1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW + +The CS8900-based ISA Ethernet Adapters from Cirrus Logic follow +IEEE 802.3 standards and support half or full-duplex operation in ISA bus +computers on 10 Mbps Ethernet networks. The adapters are designed for operation +in 16-bit ISA or EISA bus expansion slots and are available in +10BaseT-only or 3-media configurations (10BaseT, 10Base2, and AUI for 10Base-5 +or fiber networks). + +CS8920-based adapters are similar to the CS8900-based adapter with additional +features for Plug and Play (PnP) support and Wakeup Frame recognition. As +such, the configuration procedures differ somewhat between the two types of +adapters. Refer to the "Adapter Configuration" section for details on +configuring both types of adapters. + + +1.2 DRIVER DESCRIPTION + +The CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapter driver for Linux supports the Linux +v2.3.48 or greater kernel. It can be compiled directly into the kernel +or loaded at run-time as a device driver module. + +1.2.1 Driver Name: cs89x0 + +1.2.2 Files in the Driver Archive: + +The files in the driver at Cirrus' website include: + + readme.txt - this file + build - batch file to compile cs89x0.c. + cs89x0.c - driver C code + cs89x0.h - driver header file + cs89x0.o - pre-compiled module (for v2.2.5 kernel) + config/Config.in - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + config/Makefile - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + config/Space.c - sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel. + + + +1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS + +The following hardware is required: + + * Cirrus Logic LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA Adapter + + * IBM or IBM-compatible PC with: + * An 80386 or higher processor + * 16 bytes of contiguous IO space available between 210h - 370h + * One available IRQ (5,10,11,or 12 for the CS8900, 3-7,9-15 for CS8920). + + * Appropriate cable (and connector for AUI, 10BASE-2) for your network + topology. + +The following software is required: + +* LINUX kernel version 2.3.48 or higher + + * CS8900/20 Setup Utility (DOS-based) + + * LINUX kernel sources for your kernel (if compiling into kernel) + + * GNU Toolkit (gcc and make) v2.6 or above (if compiling into kernel + or a module) + + + +1.4 LICENSING INFORMATION + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under +the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation, version 1. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT +ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for +more details. + +For a full copy of the GNU General Public License, write to the Free Software +Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + + + +2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION +=============================================================================== + +Both the CS8900 and CS8920-based adapters can be configured using parameters +stored in an on-board EEPROM. You must use the DOS-based CS8900/20 Setup +Utility if you want to change the adapter's configuration in EEPROM. + +When loading the driver as a module, you can specify many of the adapter's +configuration parameters on the command-line to override the EEPROM's settings +or for interface configuration when an EEPROM is not used. (CS8920-based +adapters must use an EEPROM.) See Section 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE. + +Since the CS8900/20 Setup Utility is a DOS-based application, you must install +and configure the adapter in a DOS-based system using the CS8900/20 Setup +Utility before installation in the target LINUX system. (Not required if +installing a CS8900-based adapter and the default configuration is acceptable.) + + +2.1 CS8900-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION + +CS8900-based adapters shipped from Cirrus Logic have been configured +with the following "default" settings: + + Operation Mode: Memory Mode + IRQ: 10 + Base I/O Address: 300 + Memory Base Address: D0000 + Optimization: DOS Client + Transmission Mode: Half-duplex + BootProm: None + Media Type: Autodetect (3-media cards) or + 10BASE-T (10BASE-T only adapter) + +You should only change the default configuration settings if conflicts with +another adapter exists. To change the adapter's configuration, run the +CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + +2.2 CS8920-BASED ADAPTER CONFIGURATION + +CS8920-based adapters are shipped from Cirrus Logic configured as Plug +and Play (PnP) enabled. However, since the cs89x0 driver does NOT +support PnP, you must install the CS8920 adapter in a DOS-based PC and +run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility to disable PnP and configure the +adapter before installation in the target Linux system. Failure to do +this will leave the adapter inactive and the driver will be unable to +communicate with the adapter. + + + **************************************************************** + * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS: * + * * + * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS ARE PLUG and PLAY ENABLED BY DEFAULT. * + * THE CS89X0 DRIVER DOES NOT SUPPORT PnP. THEREFORE, YOU MUST * + * RUN THE CS8900/20 SETUP UTILITY TO DISABLE PnP SUPPORT AND * + * TO ACTIVATE THE ADAPTER. * + **************************************************************** + + + + +3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE +=============================================================================== + +If the driver is compiled as a loadable module, you can load the driver module +with the 'modprobe' command. Many of the adapter's configuration parameters can +be specified as command-line arguments to the load command. This facility +provides a means to override the EEPROM's settings or for interface +configuration when an EEPROM is not used. + +Example: + + insmod cs89x0.o io=0x200 irq=0xA media=aui + +This example loads the module and configures the adapter to use an IO port base +address of 200h, interrupt 10, and use the AUI media connection. The following +configuration options are available on the command line: + +* io=### - specify IO address (200h-360h) +* irq=## - specify interrupt level +* use_dma=1 - Enable DMA +* dma=# - specify dma channel (Driver is compiled to support + Rx DMA only) +* dmasize=# (16 or 64) - DMA size 16K or 64K. Default value is set to 16. +* media=rj45 - specify media type + or media=bnc + or media=aui + or media=auto +* duplex=full - specify forced half/full/autonegotiate duplex + or duplex=half + or duplex=auto +* debug=# - debug level (only available if the driver was compiled + for debugging) + +NOTES: + +a) If an EEPROM is present, any specified command-line parameter + will override the corresponding configuration value stored in + EEPROM. + +b) The "io" parameter must be specified on the command-line. + +c) The driver's hardware probe routine is designed to avoid + writing to I/O space until it knows that there is a cs89x0 + card at the written addresses. This could cause problems + with device probing. To avoid this behaviour, add one + to the `io=' module parameter. This doesn't actually change + the I/O address, but it is a flag to tell the driver + to partially initialise the hardware before trying to + identify the card. This could be dangerous if you are + not sure that there is a cs89x0 card at the provided address. + + For example, to scan for an adapter located at IO base 0x300, + specify an IO address of 0x301. + +d) The "duplex=auto" parameter is only supported for the CS8920. + +e) The minimum command-line configuration required if an EEPROM is + not present is: + + io + irq + media type (no autodetect) + +f) The following additional parameters are CS89XX defaults (values + used with no EEPROM or command-line argument). + + * DMA Burst = enabled + * IOCHRDY Enabled = enabled + * UseSA = enabled + * CS8900 defaults to half-duplex if not specified on command-line + * CS8920 defaults to autoneg if not specified on command-line + * Use reset defaults for other config parameters + * dma_mode = 0 + +g) You can use ifconfig to set the adapter's Ethernet address. + +h) Many Linux distributions use the 'modprobe' command to load + modules. This program uses the '/etc/conf.modules' file to + determine configuration information which is passed to a driver + module when it is loaded. All the configuration options which are + described above may be placed within /etc/conf.modules. + + For example: + + > cat /etc/conf.modules + ... + alias eth0 cs89x0 + options cs89x0 io=0x0200 dma=5 use_dma=1 + ... + + In this example we are telling the module system that the + ethernet driver for this machine should use the cs89x0 driver. We + are asking 'modprobe' to pass the 'io', 'dma' and 'use_dma' + arguments to the driver when it is loaded. + +i) Cirrus recommend that the cs89x0 use the ISA DMA channels 5, 6 or + 7. You will probably find that other DMA channels will not work. + +j) The cs89x0 supports DMA for receiving only. DMA mode is + significantly more efficient. Flooding a 400 MHz Celeron machine + with large ping packets consumes 82% of its CPU capacity in non-DMA + mode. With DMA this is reduced to 45%. + +k) If your Linux kernel was compiled with inbuilt plug-and-play + support you will be able to find information about the cs89x0 card + with the command + + cat /proc/isapnp + +l) If during DMA operation you find erratic behavior or network data + corruption you should use your PC's BIOS to slow the EISA bus clock. + +m) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel + (non-modular) then its I/O address is automatically determined by + ISA bus probing. The IRQ number, media options, etc are determined + from the card's EEPROM. + +n) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel, DMA + mode may be selected by providing the kernel with a boot option + 'cs89x0_dma=N' where 'N' is the desired DMA channel number (5, 6 or 7). + + Kernel boot options may be provided on the LILO command line: + + LILO boot: linux cs89x0_dma=5 + + or they may be placed in /etc/lilo.conf: + + image=/boot/bzImage-2.3.48 + append="cs89x0_dma=5" + label=linux + root=/dev/hda5 + read-only + + The DMA Rx buffer size is hardwired to 16 kbytes in this mode. + (64k mode is not available). + + +4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER +=============================================================================== + +The cs89x0 driver can be compiled directly into the kernel or compiled into +a loadable device driver module. + + +4.1 COMPILING THE DRIVER AS A LOADABLE MODULE + +To compile the driver into a loadable module, use the following command +(single command line, without quotes): + +"gcc -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/include -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet -Wall +-Wstrict-prototypes -O2 -fomit-frame-pointer -DMODULE -DCONFIG_MODVERSIONS +-c cs89x0.c" + +4.2 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT MEMORY MODE + +Support for memory mode was not carried over into the 2.3 series kernels. + +4.3 COMPILING THE DRIVER TO SUPPORT Rx DMA + +The compile-time optionality for DMA was removed in the 2.3 kernel +series. DMA support is now unconditionally part of the driver. It is +enabled by the 'use_dma=1' module option. + + +5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING +=============================================================================== + +5.1 KNOWN DEFECTS and LIMITATIONS + +Refer to the RELEASE.TXT file distributed as part of this archive for a list of +known defects, driver limitations, and work arounds. + + +5.2 TESTING THE ADAPTER + +Once the adapter has been installed and configured, the diagnostic option of +the CS8900/20 Setup Utility can be used to test the functionality of the +adapter and its network connection. Use the diagnostics 'Self Test' option to +test the functionality of the adapter with the hardware configuration you have +assigned. You can use the diagnostics 'Network Test' to test the ability of the +adapter to communicate across the Ethernet with another PC equipped with a +CS8900/20-based adapter card (it must also be running the CS8900/20 Setup +Utility). + + NOTE: The Setup Utility's diagnostics are designed to run in a + DOS-only operating system environment. DO NOT run the diagnostics + from a DOS or command prompt session under Windows 95, Windows NT, + OS/2, or other operating system. + +To run the diagnostics tests on the CS8900/20 adapter: + + 1.) Boot DOS on the PC and start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + 2.) The adapter's current configuration is displayed. Hit the ENTER key to + get to the main menu. + + 4.) Select 'Diagnostics' (ALT-G) from the main menu. + * Select 'Self-Test' to test the adapter's basic functionality. + * Select 'Network Test' to test the network connection and cabling. + + +5.2.1 DIAGNOSTIC SELF-TEST + +The diagnostic self-test checks the adapter's basic functionality as well as +its ability to communicate across the ISA bus based on the system resources +assigned during hardware configuration. The following tests are performed: + + * IO Register Read/Write Test + The IO Register Read/Write test insures that the CS8900/20 can be + accessed in IO mode, and that the IO base address is correct. + + * Shared Memory Test + The Shared Memory test insures the CS8900/20 can be accessed in memory + mode and that the range of memory addresses assigned does not conflict + with other devices in the system. + + * Interrupt Test + The Interrupt test insures there are no conflicts with the assigned IRQ + signal. + + * EEPROM Test + The EEPROM test insures the EEPROM can be read. + + * Chip RAM Test + The Chip RAM test insures the 4K of memory internal to the CS8900/20 is + working properly. + + * Internal Loop-back Test + The Internal Loop Back test insures the adapter's transmitter and + receiver are operating properly. If this test fails, make sure the + adapter's cable is connected to the network (check for LED activity for + example). + + * Boot PROM Test + The Boot PROM test insures the Boot PROM is present, and can be read. + Failure indicates the Boot PROM was not successfully read due to a + hardware problem or due to a conflicts on the Boot PROM address + assignment. (Test only applies if the adapter is configured to use the + Boot PROM option.) + +Failure of a test item indicates a possible system resource conflict with +another device on the ISA bus. In this case, you should use the Manual Setup +option to reconfigure the adapter by selecting a different value for the system +resource that failed. + + +5.2.2 DIAGNOSTIC NETWORK TEST + +The Diagnostic Network Test verifies a working network connection by +transferring data between two CS8900/20 adapters installed in different PCs +on the same network. (Note: the diagnostic network test should not be run +between two nodes across a router.) + +This test requires that each of the two PCs have a CS8900/20-based adapter +installed and have the CS8900/20 Setup Utility running. The first PC is +configured as a Responder and the other PC is configured as an Initiator. +Once the Initiator is started, it sends data frames to the Responder which +returns the frames to the Initiator. + +The total number of frames received and transmitted are displayed on the +Initiator's display, along with a count of the number of frames received and +transmitted OK or in error. The test can be terminated anytime by the user at +either PC. + +To setup the Diagnostic Network Test: + + 1.) Select a PC with a CS8900/20-based adapter and a known working network + connection to act as the Responder. Run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility + and select 'Diagnostics -> Network Test -> Responder' from the main + menu. Hit ENTER to start the Responder. + + 2.) Return to the PC with the CS8900/20-based adapter you want to test and + start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility. + + 3.) From the main menu, Select 'Diagnostic -> Network Test -> Initiator'. + Hit ENTER to start the test. + +You may stop the test on the Initiator at any time while allowing the Responder +to continue running. In this manner, you can move to additional PCs and test +them by starting the Initiator on another PC without having to stop/start the +Responder. + + + +5.3 USING THE ADAPTER'S LEDs + +The 2 and 3-media adapters have two LEDs visible on the back end of the board +located near the 10Base-T connector. + +Link Integrity LED: A "steady" ON of the green LED indicates a valid 10Base-T +connection. (Only applies to 10Base-T. The green LED has no significance for +a 10Base-2 or AUI connection.) + +TX/RX LED: The yellow LED lights briefly each time the adapter transmits or +receives data. (The yellow LED will appear to "flicker" on a typical network.) + + +5.4 RESOLVING I/O CONFLICTS + +An IO conflict occurs when two or more adapter use the same ISA resource (IO +address, memory address or IRQ). You can usually detect an IO conflict in one +of four ways after installing and or configuring the CS8900/20-based adapter: + + 1.) The system does not boot properly (or at all). + + 2.) The driver cannot communicate with the adapter, reporting an "Adapter + not found" error message. + + 3.) You cannot connect to the network or the driver will not load. + + 4.) If you have configured the adapter to run in memory mode but the driver + reports it is using IO mode when loading, this is an indication of a + memory address conflict. + +If an IO conflict occurs, run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility and perform a +diagnostic self-test. Normally, the ISA resource in conflict will fail the +self-test. If so, reconfigure the adapter selecting another choice for the +resource in conflict. Run the diagnostics again to check for further IO +conflicts. + +In some cases, such as when the PC will not boot, it may be necessary to remove +the adapter and reconfigure it by installing it in another PC to run the +CS8900/20 Setup Utility. Once reinstalled in the target system, run the +diagnostics self-test to ensure the new configuration is free of conflicts +before loading the driver again. + +When manually configuring the adapter, keep in mind the typical ISA system +resource usage as indicated in the tables below. + +I/O Address Device IRQ Device +----------- -------- --- -------- + 200-20F Game I/O adapter 3 COM2, Bus Mouse + 230-23F Bus Mouse 4 COM1 + 270-27F LPT3: third parallel port 5 LPT2 + 2F0-2FF COM2: second serial port 6 Floppy Disk controller + 320-32F Fixed disk controller 7 LPT1 + 8 Real-time Clock + 9 EGA/VGA display adapter + 12 Mouse (PS/2) +Memory Address Device 13 Math Coprocessor +-------------- --------------------- 14 Hard Disk controller +A000-BFFF EGA Graphics Adapter +A000-C7FF VGA Graphics Adapter +B000-BFFF Mono Graphics Adapter +B800-BFFF Color Graphics Adapter +E000-FFFF AT BIOS + + + + +6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT +=============================================================================== + +6.1 CONTACTING CIRRUS LOGIC'S TECHNICAL SUPPORT + +Cirrus Logic's CS89XX Technical Application Support can be reached at: + +Telephone :(800) 888-5016 (from inside U.S. and Canada) + :(512) 442-7555 (from outside the U.S. and Canada) +Fax :(512) 912-3871 +Email :ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com +WWW :http://www.cirrus.com + + +6.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED BEFORE CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT + +Before contacting Cirrus Logic for technical support, be prepared to provide as +Much of the following information as possible. + +1.) Adapter type (CRD8900, CDB8900, CDB8920, etc.) + +2.) Adapter configuration + + * IO Base, Memory Base, IO or memory mode enabled, IRQ, DMA channel + * Plug and Play enabled/disabled (CS8920-based adapters only) + * Configured for media auto-detect or specific media type (which type). + +3.) PC System's Configuration + + * Plug and Play system (yes/no) + * BIOS (make and version) + * System make and model + * CPU (type and speed) + * System RAM + * SCSI Adapter + +4.) Software + + * CS89XX driver and version + * Your network operating system and version + * Your system's OS version + * Version of all protocol support files + +5.) Any Error Message displayed. + + + +6.3 OBTAINING THE LATEST DRIVER VERSION + +You can obtain the latest CS89XX drivers and support software from Cirrus Logic's +Web site. You can also contact Cirrus Logic's Technical Support (email: +ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com) and request that you be registered for automatic +software-update notification. + +Cirrus Logic maintains a web page at http://www.cirrus.com with the +latest drivers and technical publications. + + +6.4 Current maintainer + +In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew +Morton. + +6.5 Kernel module parameters + +For use in embedded environments with no cs89x0 EEPROM, the kernel boot +parameter `cs89x0_media=' has been implemented. Usage is: + + cs89x0_media=rj45 or + cs89x0_media=aui or + cs89x0_media=bnc + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/davicom/dm9000.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/davicom/dm9000.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5552e2e575c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/davicom/dm9000.txt @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +DM9000 Network driver +===================== + +Copyright 2008 Simtec Electronics, + Ben Dooks <ben@simtec.co.uk> <ben-linux@fluff.org> + + +Introduction +------------ + +This file describes how to use the DM9000 platform-device based network driver +that is contained in the files drivers/net/dm9000.c and drivers/net/dm9000.h. + +The driver supports three DM9000 variants, the DM9000E which is the first chip +supported as well as the newer DM9000A and DM9000B devices. It is currently +maintained and tested by Ben Dooks, who should be CC: to any patches for this +driver. + + +Defining the platform device +---------------------------- + +The minimum set of resources attached to the platform device are as follows: + + 1) The physical address of the address register + 2) The physical address of the data register + 3) The IRQ line the device's interrupt pin is connected to. + +These resources should be specified in that order, as the ordering of the +two address regions is important (the driver expects these to be address +and then data). + +An example from arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/mach-bast.c is: + +static struct resource bast_dm9k_resource[] = { + [0] = { + .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000, + .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 3, + .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM, + }, + [1] = { + .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40, + .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40 + 0x3f, + .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM, + }, + [2] = { + .start = IRQ_DM9000, + .end = IRQ_DM9000, + .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ | IORESOURCE_IRQ_HIGHLEVEL, + } +}; + +static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = { + .name = "dm9000", + .id = 0, + .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource), + .resource = bast_dm9k_resource, +}; + +Note the setting of the IRQ trigger flag in bast_dm9k_resource[2].flags, +as this will generate a warning if it is not present. The trigger from +the flags field will be passed to request_irq() when registering the IRQ +handler to ensure that the IRQ is setup correctly. + +This shows a typical platform device, without the optional configuration +platform data supplied. The next example uses the same resources, but adds +the optional platform data to pass extra configuration data: + +static struct dm9000_plat_data bast_dm9k_platdata = { + .flags = DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY, +}; + +static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = { + .name = "dm9000", + .id = 0, + .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource), + .resource = bast_dm9k_resource, + .dev = { + .platform_data = &bast_dm9k_platdata, + } +}; + +The platform data is defined in include/linux/dm9000.h and described below. + + +Platform data +------------- + +Extra platform data for the DM9000 can describe the IO bus width to the +device, whether or not an external PHY is attached to the device and +the availability of an external configuration EEPROM. + +The flags for the platform data .flags field are as follows: + +DM9000_PLATF_8BITONLY + + The IO should be done with 8bit operations. + +DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY + + The IO should be done with 16bit operations. + +DM9000_PLATF_32BITONLY + + The IO should be done with 32bit operations. + +DM9000_PLATF_EXT_PHY + + The chip is connected to an external PHY. + +DM9000_PLATF_NO_EEPROM + + This can be used to signify that the board does not have an + EEPROM, or that the EEPROM should be hidden from the user. + +DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY + + Switch to using the simpler PHY polling method which does not + try and read the MII PHY state regularly. This is only available + when using the internal PHY. See the section on link state polling + for more information. + + The config symbol DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL, Kconfig entry + "Force simple NSR based PHY polling" allows this flag to be + forced on at build time. + + +PHY Link state polling +---------------------- + +The driver keeps track of the link state and informs the network core +about link (carrier) availability. This is managed by several methods +depending on the version of the chip and on which PHY is being used. + +For the internal PHY, the original (and currently default) method is +to read the MII state, either when the status changes if we have the +necessary interrupt support in the chip or every two seconds via a +periodic timer. + +To reduce the overhead for the internal PHY, there is now the option +of using the DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL config, or DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY +platform data option to read the summary information without the +expensive MII accesses. This method is faster, but does not print +as much information. + +When using an external PHY, the driver currently has to poll the MII +link status as there is no method for getting an interrupt on link change. + + +DM9000A / DM9000B +----------------- + +These chips are functionally similar to the DM9000E and are supported easily +by the same driver. The features are: + + 1) Interrupt on internal PHY state change. This means that the periodic + polling of the PHY status may be disabled on these devices when using + the internal PHY. + + 2) TCP/UDP checksum offloading, which the driver does not currently support. + + +ethtool +------- + +The driver supports the ethtool interface for access to the driver +state information, the PHY state and the EEPROM. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/de4x5.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/de4x5.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c8e4ca9b2c3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/de4x5.txt @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ + Originally, this driver was written for the Digital Equipment + Corporation series of EtherWORKS Ethernet cards: + + DE425 TP/COAX EISA + DE434 TP PCI + DE435 TP/COAX/AUI PCI + DE450 TP/COAX/AUI PCI + DE500 10/100 PCI Fasternet + + but it will now attempt to support all cards which conform to the + Digital Semiconductor SROM Specification. The driver currently + recognises the following chips: + + DC21040 (no SROM) + DC21041[A] + DC21140[A] + DC21142 + DC21143 + + So far the driver is known to work with the following cards: + + KINGSTON + Linksys + ZNYX342 + SMC8432 + SMC9332 (w/new SROM) + ZNYX31[45] + ZNYX346 10/100 4 port (can act as a 10/100 bridge!) + + The driver has been tested on a relatively busy network using the DE425, + DE434, DE435 and DE500 cards and benchmarked with 'ttcp': it transferred + 16M of data to a DECstation 5000/200 as follows: + + TCP UDP + TX RX TX RX + DE425 1030k 997k 1170k 1128k + DE434 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k + DE435 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k + DE500 1063k 998k 1170k 1125k in 10Mb/s mode + + All values are typical (in kBytes/sec) from a sample of 4 for each + measurement. Their error is +/-20k on a quiet (private) network and also + depend on what load the CPU has. + + ========================================================================= + + The ability to load this driver as a loadable module has been included + and used extensively during the driver development (to save those long + reboot sequences). Loadable module support under PCI and EISA has been + achieved by letting the driver autoprobe as if it were compiled into the + kernel. Do make sure you're not sharing interrupts with anything that + cannot accommodate interrupt sharing! + + To utilise this ability, you have to do 8 things: + + 0) have a copy of the loadable modules code installed on your system. + 1) copy de4x5.c from the /linux/drivers/net directory to your favourite + temporary directory. + 2) for fixed autoprobes (not recommended), edit the source code near + line 5594 to reflect the I/O address you're using, or assign these when + loading by: + + insmod de4x5 io=0xghh where g = bus number + hh = device number + + NB: autoprobing for modules is now supported by default. You may just + use: + + insmod de4x5 + + to load all available boards. For a specific board, still use + the 'io=?' above. + 3) compile de4x5.c, but include -DMODULE in the command line to ensure + that the correct bits are compiled (see end of source code). + 4) if you are wanting to add a new card, goto 5. Otherwise, recompile a + kernel with the de4x5 configuration turned off and reboot. + 5) insmod de4x5 [io=0xghh] + 6) run the net startup bits for your new eth?? interface(s) manually + (usually /etc/rc.inet[12] at boot time). + 7) enjoy! + + To unload a module, turn off the associated interface(s) + 'ifconfig eth?? down' then 'rmmod de4x5'. + + Automedia detection is included so that in principle you can disconnect + from, e.g. TP, reconnect to BNC and things will still work (after a + pause whilst the driver figures out where its media went). My tests + using ping showed that it appears to work.... + + By default, the driver will now autodetect any DECchip based card. + Should you have a need to restrict the driver to DIGITAL only cards, you + can compile with a DEC_ONLY define, or if loading as a module, use the + 'dec_only=1' parameter. + + I've changed the timing routines to use the kernel timer and scheduling + functions so that the hangs and other assorted problems that occurred + while autosensing the media should be gone. A bonus for the DC21040 + auto media sense algorithm is that it can now use one that is more in + line with the rest (the DC21040 chip doesn't have a hardware timer). + The downside is the 1 'jiffies' (10ms) resolution. + + IEEE 802.3u MII interface code has been added in anticipation that some + products may use it in the future. + + The SMC9332 card has a non-compliant SROM which needs fixing - I have + patched this driver to detect it because the SROM format used complies + to a previous DEC-STD format. + + I have removed the buffer copies needed for receive on Intels. I cannot + remove them for Alphas since the Tulip hardware only does longword + aligned DMA transfers and the Alphas get alignment traps with non + longword aligned data copies (which makes them really slow). No comment. + + I have added SROM decoding routines to make this driver work with any + card that supports the Digital Semiconductor SROM spec. This will help + all cards running the dc2114x series chips in particular. Cards using + the dc2104x chips should run correctly with the basic driver. I'm in + debt to <mjacob@feral.com> for the testing and feedback that helped get + this feature working. So far we have tested KINGSTON, SMC8432, SMC9332 + (with the latest SROM complying with the SROM spec V3: their first was + broken), ZNYX342 and LinkSys. ZNYX314 (dual 21041 MAC) and ZNYX 315 + (quad 21041 MAC) cards also appear to work despite their incorrectly + wired IRQs. + + I have added a temporary fix for interrupt problems when some SCSI cards + share the same interrupt as the DECchip based cards. The problem occurs + because the SCSI card wants to grab the interrupt as a fast interrupt + (runs the service routine with interrupts turned off) vs. this card + which really needs to run the service routine with interrupts turned on. + This driver will now add the interrupt service routine as a fast + interrupt if it is bounced from the slow interrupt. THIS IS NOT A + RECOMMENDED WAY TO RUN THE DRIVER and has been done for a limited time + until people sort out their compatibility issues and the kernel + interrupt service code is fixed. YOU SHOULD SEPARATE OUT THE FAST + INTERRUPT CARDS FROM THE SLOW INTERRUPT CARDS to ensure that they do not + run on the same interrupt. PCMCIA/CardBus is another can of worms... + + Finally, I think I have really fixed the module loading problem with + more than one DECchip based card. As a side effect, I don't mess with + the device structure any more which means that if more than 1 card in + 2.0.x is installed (4 in 2.1.x), the user will have to edit + linux/drivers/net/Space.c to make room for them. Hence, module loading + is the preferred way to use this driver, since it doesn't have this + limitation. + + Where SROM media detection is used and full duplex is specified in the + SROM, the feature is ignored unless lp->params.fdx is set at compile + time OR during a module load (insmod de4x5 args='eth??:fdx' [see + below]). This is because there is no way to automatically detect full + duplex links except through autonegotiation. When I include the + autonegotiation feature in the SROM autoconf code, this detection will + occur automatically for that case. + + Command line arguments are now allowed, similar to passing arguments + through LILO. This will allow a per adapter board set up of full duplex + and media. The only lexical constraints are: the board name (dev->name) + appears in the list before its parameters. The list of parameters ends + either at the end of the parameter list or with another board name. The + following parameters are allowed: + + fdx for full duplex + autosense to set the media/speed; with the following + sub-parameters: + TP, TP_NW, BNC, AUI, BNC_AUI, 100Mb, 10Mb, AUTO + + Case sensitivity is important for the sub-parameters. They *must* be + upper case. Examples: + + insmod de4x5 args='eth1:fdx autosense=BNC eth0:autosense=100Mb'. + + For a compiled in driver, in linux/drivers/net/CONFIG, place e.g. + DE4X5_OPTS = -DDE4X5_PARM='"eth0:fdx autosense=AUI eth2:autosense=TP"' + + Yes, I know full duplex isn't permissible on BNC or AUI; they're just + examples. By default, full duplex is turned off and AUTO is the default + autosense setting. In reality, I expect only the full duplex option to + be used. Note the use of single quotes in the two examples above and the + lack of commas to separate items. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/dmfe.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/dmfe.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..25320bf19c86 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dec/dmfe.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +Note: This driver doesn't have a maintainer. + +Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux. + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License +as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 +of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +GNU General Public License for more details. + + +This driver provides kernel support for Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 ethernet cards ( CNET +10/100 ethernet cards uses Davicom chipset too, so this driver supports CNET cards too ).If you +didn't compile this driver as a module, it will automatically load itself on boot and print a +line similar to : + + dmfe: Davicom DM9xxx net driver, version 1.36.4 (2002-01-17) + +If you compiled this driver as a module, you have to load it on boot.You can load it with command : + + insmod dmfe + +This way it will autodetect the device mode.This is the suggested way to load the module.Or you can pass +a mode= setting to module while loading, like : + + insmod dmfe mode=0 # Force 10M Half Duplex + insmod dmfe mode=1 # Force 100M Half Duplex + insmod dmfe mode=4 # Force 10M Full Duplex + insmod dmfe mode=5 # Force 100M Full Duplex + +Next you should configure your network interface with a command similar to : + + ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18 + ^^^^^^^^^^^ + Your IP Address + +Then you may have to modify the default routing table with command : + + route add default eth0 + + +Now your ethernet card should be up and running. + + +TODO: + +Implement pci_driver::suspend() and pci_driver::resume() power management methods. +Check on 64 bit boxes. +Check and fix on big endian boxes. +Test and make sure PCI latency is now correct for all cases. + + +Authors: + +Sten Wang <sten_wang@davicom.com.tw > : Original Author + +Contributors: + +Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br> +Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk> +Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> +Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dlink/dl2k.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dlink/dl2k.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cba74f7a3abc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/dlink/dl2k.txt @@ -0,0 +1,282 @@ + + D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Installation + for Linux + May 23, 2002 + +Contents +======== + - Compatibility List + - Quick Install + - Compiling the Driver + - Installing the Driver + - Option parameter + - Configuration Script Sample + - Troubleshooting + + +Compatibility List +================= +Adapter Support: + +D-Link DGE-550T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. +D-Link DGE-550SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. +D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter. + + +The driver support Linux kernel 2.4.7 later. We had tested it +on the environments below. + + . Red Hat v6.2 (update kernel to 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.0 (update kernel to 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.1 (kernel 2.4.7) + . Red Hat v7.2 (kernel 2.4.7-10) + + +Quick Install +============= +Install linux driver as following command: + +1. make all +2. insmod dl2k.ko +3. ifconfig eth0 up 10.xxx.xxx.xxx netmask 255.0.0.0 + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^\ ^^^^^^^^\ + IP NETMASK +Now eth0 should active, you can test it by "ping" or get more information by +"ifconfig". If tested ok, continue the next step. + +4. cp dl2k.ko /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/drivers/net +5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.d/dl2k.conf: + alias eth0 dl2k +6. Run depmod to updated module indexes. +7. Run "netconfig" or "netconf" to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0 + located at /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts or create it manually. + [see - Configuration Script Sample] +8. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time. + +Compiling the Driver +==================== + In Linux, NIC drivers are most commonly configured as loadable modules. +The approach of building a monolithic kernel has become obsolete. The driver +can be compiled as part of a monolithic kernel, but is strongly discouraged. +The remainder of this section assumes the driver is built as a loadable module. +In the Linux environment, it is a good idea to rebuild the driver from the +source instead of relying on a precompiled version. This approach provides +better reliability since a precompiled driver might depend on libraries or +kernel features that are not present in a given Linux installation. + +The 3 files necessary to build Linux device driver are dl2k.c, dl2k.h and +Makefile. To compile, the Linux installation must include the gcc compiler, +the kernel source, and the kernel headers. The Linux driver supports Linux +Kernels 2.4.7. Copy the files to a directory and enter the following command +to compile and link the driver: + +CD-ROM drive +------------ + +[root@XXX /] mkdir cdrom +[root@XXX /] mount -r -t iso9660 -o conv=auto /dev/cdrom /cdrom +[root@XXX /] cd root +[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k +[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] cp /cdrom/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz +[root@XXX dl2k] make all + +Floppy disc drive +----------------- + +[root@XXX /] cd root +[root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k +[root@XXX /root] cd dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] mcopy a:/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k +[root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz +[root@XXX dl2k] make all + +Installing the Driver +===================== + + Manual Installation + ------------------- + Once the driver has been compiled, it must be loaded, enabled, and bound + to a protocol stack in order to establish network connectivity. To load a + module enter the command: + + insmod dl2k.o + + or + + insmod dl2k.o <optional parameter> ; add parameter + + =============================================================== + example: insmod dl2k.o media=100mbps_hd + or insmod dl2k.o media=3 + or insmod dl2k.o media=3,2 ; for 2 cards + =============================================================== + + Please reference the list of the command line parameters supported by + the Linux device driver below. + + The insmod command only loads the driver and gives it a name of the form + eth0, eth1, etc. To bring the NIC into an operational state, + it is necessary to issue the following command: + + ifconfig eth0 up + + Finally, to bind the driver to the active protocol (e.g., TCP/IP with + Linux), enter the following command: + + ifup eth0 + + Note that this is meaningful only if the system can find a configuration + script that contains the necessary network information. A sample will be + given in the next paragraph. + + The commands to unload a driver are as follows: + + ifdown eth0 + ifconfig eth0 down + rmmod dl2k.o + + The following are the commands to list the currently loaded modules and + to see the current network configuration. + + lsmod + ifconfig + + + Automated Installation + ---------------------- + This section describes how to install the driver such that it is + automatically loaded and configured at boot time. The following description + is based on a Red Hat 6.0/7.0 distribution, but it can easily be ported to + other distributions as well. + + Red Hat v6.x/v7.x + ----------------- + 1. Copy dl2k.o to the network modules directory, typically + /lib/modules/2.x.x-xx/net or /lib/modules/2.x.x/kernel/drivers/net. + 2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly in the + /etc/modprobe.d/ directory. Add the following lines: + + alias ethx dl2k + options dl2k <optional parameters> + + where ethx will be eth0 if the NIC is the only ethernet adapter, eth1 if + one other ethernet adapter is installed, etc. Refer to the table in the + previous section for the list of optional parameters. + 3. Locate the network configuration scripts, normally the + /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory, and create a configuration + script named ifcfg-ethx that contains network information. + 4. Note that for most Linux distributions, Red Hat included, a configuration + utility with a graphical user interface is provided to perform steps 2 + and 3 above. + + +Parameter Description +===================== +You can install this driver without any additional parameter. However, if you +are going to have extensive functions then it is necessary to set extra +parameter. Below is a list of the command line parameters supported by the +Linux device +driver. + +mtu=packet_size - Specifies the maximum packet size. default + is 1500. + +media=media_type - Specifies the media type the NIC operates at. + autosense Autosensing active media. + 10mbps_hd 10Mbps half duplex. + 10mbps_fd 10Mbps full duplex. + 100mbps_hd 100Mbps half duplex. + 100mbps_fd 100Mbps full duplex. + 1000mbps_fd 1000Mbps full duplex. + 1000mbps_hd 1000Mbps half duplex. + 0 Autosensing active media. + 1 10Mbps half duplex. + 2 10Mbps full duplex. + 3 100Mbps half duplex. + 4 100Mbps full duplex. + 5 1000Mbps half duplex. + 6 1000Mbps full duplex. + + By default, the NIC operates at autosense. + 1000mbps_fd and 1000mbps_hd types are only + available for fiber adapter. + +vlan=n - Specifies the VLAN ID. If vlan=0, the + Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) function is + disable. + +jumbo=[0|1] - Specifies the jumbo frame support. If jumbo=1, + the NIC accept jumbo frames. By default, this + function is disabled. + Jumbo frame usually improve the performance + int gigabit. + This feature need jumbo frame compatible + remote. + +rx_coalesce=m - Number of rx frame handled each interrupt. +rx_timeout=n - Rx DMA wait time for an interrupt. + If set rx_coalesce > 0, hardware only assert + an interrupt for m frames. Hardware won't + assert rx interrupt until m frames received or + reach timeout of n * 640 nano seconds. + Set proper rx_coalesce and rx_timeout can + reduce congestion collapse and overload which + has been a bottleneck for high speed network. + + For example, rx_coalesce=10 rx_timeout=800. + that is, hardware assert only 1 interrupt + for 10 frames received or timeout of 512 us. + +tx_coalesce=n - Number of tx frame handled each interrupt. + Set n > 1 can reduce the interrupts + congestion usually lower performance of + high speed network card. Default is 16. + +tx_flow=[1|0] - Specifies the Tx flow control. If tx_flow=0, + the Tx flow control disable else driver + autodetect. +rx_flow=[1|0] - Specifies the Rx flow control. If rx_flow=0, + the Rx flow control enable else driver + autodetect. + + +Configuration Script Sample +=========================== +Here is a sample of a simple configuration script: + +DEVICE=eth0 +USERCTL=no +ONBOOT=yes +POOTPROTO=none +BROADCAST=207.200.5.255 +NETWORK=207.200.5.0 +NETMASK=255.255.255.0 +IPADDR=207.200.5.2 + + +Troubleshooting +=============== +Q1. Source files contain ^ M behind every line. + Make sure all files are Unix file format (no LF). Try the following + shell command to convert files. + + cat dl2k.c | col -b > dl2k.tmp + mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c + + OR + + cat dl2k.c | tr -d "\r" > dl2k.tmp + mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c + +Q2: Could not find header files (*.h) ? + To compile the driver, you need kernel header files. After + installing the kernel source, the header files are usually located in + /usr/src/linux/include, which is the default include directory configured + in Makefile. For some distributions, there is a copy of header files in + /usr/src/include/linux and /usr/src/include/asm, that you can change the + INCLUDEDIR in Makefile to /usr/include without installing kernel source. + Note that RH 7.0 didn't provide correct header files in /usr/include, + including those files will make a wrong version driver. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f88194f71c54 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa.txt @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ +The QorIQ DPAA Ethernet Driver +============================== + +Authors: +Madalin Bucur <madalin.bucur@nxp.com> +Camelia Groza <camelia.groza@nxp.com> + +Contents +======== + + - DPAA Ethernet Overview + - DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs + - Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel + - DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing + - DPAA Ethernet Features + - DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling + - Debugging + +DPAA Ethernet Overview +====================== + +DPAA stands for Data Path Acceleration Architecture and it is a +set of networking acceleration IPs that are available on several +generations of SoCs, both on PowerPC and ARM64. + +The Freescale DPAA architecture consists of a series of hardware blocks +that support Ethernet connectivity. The Ethernet driver depends upon the +following drivers in the Linux kernel: + + - Peripheral Access Memory Unit (PAMU) (* needed only for PPC platforms) + drivers/iommu/fsl_* + - Frame Manager (FMan) + drivers/net/ethernet/freescale/fman + - Queue Manager (QMan), Buffer Manager (BMan) + drivers/soc/fsl/qbman + +A simplified view of the dpaa_eth interfaces mapped to FMan MACs: + + dpaa_eth /eth0\ ... /ethN\ + driver | | | | + ------------- ---- ----------- ---- ------------- + -Ports / Tx Rx \ ... / Tx Rx \ + FMan | | | | + -MACs | MAC0 | | MACN | + / dtsec0 \ ... / dtsecN \ (or tgec) + / \ / \(or memac) + --------- -------------- --- -------------- --------- + FMan, FMan Port, FMan SP, FMan MURAM drivers + --------------------------------------------------------- + FMan HW blocks: MURAM, MACs, Ports, SP + --------------------------------------------------------- + +The dpaa_eth relation to the QMan, BMan and FMan: + ________________________________ + dpaa_eth / eth0 \ + driver / \ + --------- -^- -^- -^- --- --------- + QMan driver / \ / \ / \ \ / | BMan | + |Rx | |Rx | |Tx | |Tx | | driver | + --------- |Dfl| |Err| |Cnf| |FQs| | | + QMan HW |FQ | |FQ | |FQs| | | | | + / \ / \ / \ \ / | | + --------- --- --- --- -v- --------- + | FMan QMI | | + | FMan HW FMan BMI | BMan HW | + ----------------------- -------- + +where the acronyms used above (and in the code) are: +DPAA = Data Path Acceleration Architecture +FMan = DPAA Frame Manager +QMan = DPAA Queue Manager +BMan = DPAA Buffers Manager +QMI = QMan interface in FMan +BMI = BMan interface in FMan +FMan SP = FMan Storage Profiles +MURAM = Multi-user RAM in FMan +FQ = QMan Frame Queue +Rx Dfl FQ = default reception FQ +Rx Err FQ = Rx error frames FQ +Tx Cnf FQ = Tx confirmation FQs +Tx FQs = transmission frame queues +dtsec = datapath three speed Ethernet controller (10/100/1000 Mbps) +tgec = ten gigabit Ethernet controller (10 Gbps) +memac = multirate Ethernet MAC (10/100/1000/10000) + +DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs +============================ + +The DPAA drivers enable the Ethernet controllers present on the following SoCs: + +# PPC +P1023 +P2041 +P3041 +P4080 +P5020 +P5040 +T1023 +T1024 +T1040 +T1042 +T2080 +T4240 +B4860 + +# ARM +LS1043A +LS1046A + +Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel +======================================== + +To enable the DPAA Ethernet driver, the following Kconfig options are required: + +# common for arch/arm64 and arch/powerpc platforms +CONFIG_FSL_DPAA=y +CONFIG_FSL_FMAN=y +CONFIG_FSL_DPAA_ETH=y +CONFIG_FSL_XGMAC_MDIO=y + +# for arch/powerpc only +CONFIG_FSL_PAMU=y + +# common options needed for the PHYs used on the RDBs +CONFIG_VITESSE_PHY=y +CONFIG_REALTEK_PHY=y +CONFIG_AQUANTIA_PHY=y + +DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing +============================== + +On Rx, buffers for the incoming frames are retrieved from one of the three +existing buffers pools. The driver initializes and seeds these, each with +buffers of different sizes: 1KB, 2KB and 4KB. + +On Tx, all transmitted frames are returned to the driver through Tx +confirmation frame queues. The driver is then responsible for freeing the +buffers. In order to do this properly, a backpointer is added to the buffer +before transmission that points to the skb. When the buffer returns to the +driver on a confirmation FQ, the skb can be correctly consumed. + +DPAA Ethernet Features +====================== + +Currently the DPAA Ethernet driver enables the basic features required for +a Linux Ethernet driver. The support for advanced features will be added +gradually. + +The driver has Rx and Tx checksum offloading for UDP and TCP. Currently the Rx +checksum offload feature is enabled by default and cannot be controlled through +ethtool. Also, rx-flow-hash and rx-hashing was added. The addition of RSS +provides a big performance boost for the forwarding scenarios, allowing +different traffic flows received by one interface to be processed by different +CPUs in parallel. + +The driver has support for multiple prioritized Tx traffic classes. Priorities +range from 0 (lowest) to 3 (highest). These are mapped to HW workqueues with +strict priority levels. Each traffic class contains NR_CPU TX queues. By +default, only one traffic class is enabled and the lowest priority Tx queues +are used. Higher priority traffic classes can be enabled with the mqprio +qdisc. For example, all four traffic classes are enabled on an interface with +the following command. Furthermore, skb priority levels are mapped to traffic +classes as follows: + + * priorities 0 to 3 - traffic class 0 (low priority) + * priorities 4 to 7 - traffic class 1 (medium-low priority) + * priorities 8 to 11 - traffic class 2 (medium-high priority) + * priorities 12 to 15 - traffic class 3 (high priority) + +tc qdisc add dev <int> root handle 1: \ + mqprio num_tc 4 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 hw 1 + +DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling +========================================== + +Traffic coming on the DPAA Rx queues or on the DPAA Tx confirmation +queues is seen by the CPU as ingress traffic on a certain portal. +The DPAA QMan portal interrupts are affined each to a certain CPU. +The same portal interrupt services all the QMan portal consumers. + +By default the DPAA Ethernet driver enables RSS, making use of the +DPAA FMan Parser and Keygen blocks to distribute traffic on 128 +hardware frame queues using a hash on IP v4/v6 source and destination +and L4 source and destination ports, in present in the received frame. +When RSS is disabled, all traffic received by a certain interface is +received on the default Rx frame queue. The default DPAA Rx frame +queues are configured to put the received traffic into a pool channel +that allows any available CPU portal to dequeue the ingress traffic. +The default frame queues have the HOLDACTIVE option set, ensuring that +traffic bursts from a certain queue are serviced by the same CPU. +This ensures a very low rate of frame reordering. A drawback of this +is that only one CPU at a time can service the traffic received by a +certain interface when RSS is not enabled. + +To implement RSS, the DPAA Ethernet driver allocates an extra set of +128 Rx frame queues that are configured to dedicated channels, in a +round-robin manner. The mapping of the frame queues to CPUs is now +hardcoded, there is no indirection table to move traffic for a certain +FQ (hash result) to another CPU. The ingress traffic arriving on one +of these frame queues will arrive at the same portal and will always +be processed by the same CPU. This ensures intra-flow order preservation +and workload distribution for multiple traffic flows. + +RSS can be turned off for a certain interface using ethtool, i.e. + + # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash tcp4 "" + +To turn it back on, one needs to set rx-flow-hash for tcp4/6 or udp4/6: + + # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash udp4 sfdn + +There is no independent control for individual protocols, any command +run for one of tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 is +going to control the rx-flow-hashing for all protocols on that interface. + +Besides using the FMan Keygen computed hash for spreading traffic on the +128 Rx FQs, the DPAA Ethernet driver also sets the skb hash value when +the NETIF_F_RXHASH feature is on (active by default). This can be turned +on or off through ethtool, i.e.: + + # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing off + # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash + receive-hashing: off + # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing on + Actual changes: + receive-hashing: on + # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash + receive-hashing: on + +Please note that Rx hashing depends upon the rx-flow-hashing being on +for that interface - turning off rx-flow-hashing will also disable the +rx-hashing (without ethtool reporting it as off as that depends on the +NETIF_F_RXHASH feature flag). + +Debugging +========= + +The following statistics are exported for each interface through ethtool: + + - interrupt count per CPU + - Rx packets count per CPU + - Tx packets count per CPU + - Tx confirmed packets count per CPU + - Tx S/G frames count per CPU + - Tx error count per CPU + - Rx error count per CPU + - Rx error count per type + - congestion related statistics: + - congestion status + - time spent in congestion + - number of time the device entered congestion + - dropped packets count per cause + +The driver also exports the following information in sysfs: + + - the FQ IDs for each FQ type + /sys/devices/platform/dpaa-ethernet.0/net/<int>/fqids + + - the IDs of the buffer pools in use + /sys/devices/platform/dpaa-ethernet.0/net/<int>/bpids diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a188466b6698 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +DPAA2 DPIO (Data Path I/O) Overview +=================================== + +:Copyright: |copy| 2016-2018 NXP + +This document provides an overview of the Freescale DPAA2 DPIO +drivers + +Introduction +============ + +A DPAA2 DPIO (Data Path I/O) is a hardware object that provides +interfaces to enqueue and dequeue frames to/from network interfaces +and other accelerators. A DPIO also provides hardware buffer +pool management for network interfaces. + +This document provides an overview the Linux DPIO driver, its +subcomponents, and its APIs. + +See Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst for +a general overview of DPAA2 and the general DPAA2 driver architecture in Linux. + +Driver Overview +--------------- + +The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects discovered on the fsl-mc bus and +provides services that: + A) allow other drivers, such as the Ethernet driver, to enqueue and dequeue + frames for their respective objects + B) allow drivers to register callbacks for data availability notifications + when data becomes available on a queue or channel + C) allow drivers to manage hardware buffer pools + +The Linux DPIO driver consists of 3 primary components-- + DPIO object driver-- fsl-mc driver that manages the DPIO object + + DPIO service-- provides APIs to other Linux drivers for services + + QBman portal interface-- sends portal commands, gets responses +:: + + fsl-mc other + bus drivers + | | + +---+----+ +------+-----+ + |DPIO obj| |DPIO service| + | driver |---| (DPIO) | + +--------+ +------+-----+ + | + +------+-----+ + | QBman | + | portal i/f | + +------------+ + | + hardware + + +The diagram below shows how the DPIO driver components fit with the other +DPAA2 Linux driver components:: + +------------+ + | OS Network | + | Stack | + +------------+ +------------+ + | Allocator |. . . . . . . | Ethernet | + |(DPMCP,DPBP)| | (DPNI) | + +-.----------+ +---+---+----+ + . . ^ | + . . <data avail, | |<enqueue, + . . tx confirm> | | dequeue> + +-------------+ . | | + | DPRC driver | . +--------+ +------------+ + | (DPRC) | . . |DPIO obj| |DPIO service| + +----------+--+ | driver |-| (DPIO) | + | +--------+ +------+-----+ + |<dev add/remove> +------|-----+ + | | QBman | + +----+--------------+ | portal i/f | + | MC-bus driver | +------------+ + | | | + | /soc/fsl-mc | | + +-------------------+ | + | + =========================================|=========|======================== + +-+--DPIO---|-----------+ + | | | + | QBman Portal | + +-----------------------+ + + ============================================================================ + + +DPIO Object Driver (dpio-driver.c) +---------------------------------- + + The dpio-driver component registers with the fsl-mc bus to handle objects of + type "dpio". The implementation of probe() handles basic initialization + of the DPIO including mapping of the DPIO regions (the QBman SW portal) + and initializing interrupts and registering irq handlers. The dpio-driver + registers the probed DPIO with dpio-service. + +DPIO service (dpio-service.c, dpaa2-io.h) +------------------------------------------ + + The dpio service component provides queuing, notification, and buffers + management services to DPAA2 drivers, such as the Ethernet driver. A system + will typically allocate 1 DPIO object per CPU to allow queuing operations + to happen simultaneously across all CPUs. + + Notification handling + dpaa2_io_service_register() + + dpaa2_io_service_deregister() + + dpaa2_io_service_rearm() + + Queuing + dpaa2_io_service_pull_fq() + + dpaa2_io_service_pull_channel() + + dpaa2_io_service_enqueue_fq() + + dpaa2_io_service_enqueue_qd() + + dpaa2_io_store_create() + + dpaa2_io_store_destroy() + + dpaa2_io_store_next() + + Buffer pool management + dpaa2_io_service_release() + + dpaa2_io_service_acquire() + +QBman portal interface (qbman-portal.c) +--------------------------------------- + + The qbman-portal component provides APIs to do the low level hardware + bit twiddling for operations such as: + -initializing Qman software portals + + -building and sending portal commands + + -portal interrupt configuration and processing + + The qbman-portal APIs are not public to other drivers, and are + only used by dpio-service. + +Other (dpaa2-fd.h, dpaa2-global.h) +---------------------------------- + + Frame descriptor and scatter-gather definitions and the APIs used to + manipulate them are defined in dpaa2-fd.h. + + Dequeue result struct and parsing APIs are defined in dpaa2-global.h. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cb4c9a0c5a17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +=============================== +DPAA2 Ethernet driver +=============================== + +:Copyright: |copy| 2017-2018 NXP + +This file provides documentation for the Freescale DPAA2 Ethernet driver. + +Supported Platforms +=================== +This driver provides networking support for Freescale DPAA2 SoCs, e.g. +LS2080A, LS2088A, LS1088A. + + +Architecture Overview +===================== +Unlike regular NICs, in the DPAA2 architecture there is no single hardware block +representing network interfaces; instead, several separate hardware resources +concur to provide the networking functionality: + +- network interfaces +- queues, channels +- buffer pools +- MAC/PHY + +All hardware resources are allocated and configured through the Management +Complex (MC) portals. MC abstracts most of these resources as DPAA2 objects +and exposes ABIs through which they can be configured and controlled. A few +hardware resources, like queues, do not have a corresponding MC object and +are treated as internal resources of other objects. + +For a more detailed description of the DPAA2 architecture and its object +abstractions see *Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst*. + +Each Linux net device is built on top of a Datapath Network Interface (DPNI) +object and uses Buffer Pools (DPBPs), I/O Portals (DPIOs) and Concentrators +(DPCONs). + +Configuration interface:: + + ----------------------- + | DPAA2 Ethernet Driver | + ----------------------- + . . . + . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . + . . . + ---------- ---------- ----------- + | DPBP API | | DPNI API | | DPCON API | + ---------- ---------- ----------- + . . . software + ======= . ========== . ============ . =================== + . . . hardware + ------------------------------------------ + | MC hardware portals | + ------------------------------------------ + . . . + . . . + ------ ------ ------- + | DPBP | | DPNI | | DPCON | + ------ ------ ------- + +The DPNIs are network interfaces without a direct one-on-one mapping to PHYs. +DPBPs represent hardware buffer pools. Packet I/O is performed in the context +of DPCON objects, using DPIO portals for managing and communicating with the +hardware resources. + +Datapath (I/O) interface:: + + ----------------------------------------------- + | DPAA2 Ethernet Driver | + ----------------------------------------------- + | ^ ^ | | + | | | | | + enqueue| dequeue| data | dequeue| seed | + (Tx) | (Rx, TxC)| avail.| request| buffers| + | | notify| | | + | | | | | + V | | V V + ----------------------------------------------- + | DPIO Driver | + ----------------------------------------------- + | | | | | software + | | | | | ================ + | | | | | hardware + ----------------------------------------------- + | I/O hardware portals | + ----------------------------------------------- + | ^ ^ | | + | | | | | + | | | V | + V | ================ V + ---------------------- | ------------- + queues ---------------------- | | Buffer pool | + ---------------------- | ------------- + ======================= + Channel + +Datapath I/O (DPIO) portals provide enqueue and dequeue services, data +availability notifications and buffer pool management. DPIOs are shared between +all DPAA2 objects (and implicitly all DPAA2 kernel drivers) that work with data +frames, but must be affine to the CPUs for the purpose of traffic distribution. + +Frames are transmitted and received through hardware frame queues, which can be +grouped in channels for the purpose of hardware scheduling. The Ethernet driver +enqueues TX frames on egress queues and after transmission is complete a TX +confirmation frame is sent back to the CPU. + +When frames are available on ingress queues, a data availability notification +is sent to the CPU; notifications are raised per channel, so even if multiple +queues in the same channel have available frames, only one notification is sent. +After a channel fires a notification, is must be explicitly rearmed. + +Each network interface can have multiple Rx, Tx and confirmation queues affined +to CPUs, and one channel (DPCON) for each CPU that services at least one queue. +DPCONs are used to distribute ingress traffic to different CPUs via the cores' +affine DPIOs. + +The role of hardware buffer pools is storage of ingress frame data. Each network +interface has a privately owned buffer pool which it seeds with kernel allocated +buffers. + + +DPNIs are decoupled from PHYs; a DPNI can be connected to a PHY through a DPMAC +object or to another DPNI through an internal link, but the connection is +managed by MC and completely transparent to the Ethernet driver. + +:: + + --------- --------- --------- + | eth if1 | | eth if2 | | eth ifn | + --------- --------- --------- + . . . + . . . + . . . + --------------------------- + | DPAA2 Ethernet Driver | + --------------------------- + . . . + . . . + . . . + ------ ------ ------ ------- + | DPNI | | DPNI | | DPNI | | DPMAC |----+ + ------ ------ ------ ------- | + | | | | | + | | | | ----- + =========== ================== | PHY | + ----- + +Creating a Network Interface +============================ +A net device is created for each DPNI object probed on the MC bus. Each DPNI has +a number of properties which determine the network interface configuration +options and associated hardware resources. + +DPNI objects (and the other DPAA2 objects needed for a network interface) can be +added to a container on the MC bus in one of two ways: statically, through a +Datapath Layout Binary file (DPL) that is parsed by MC at boot time; or created +dynamically at runtime, via the DPAA2 objects APIs. + + +Features & Offloads +=================== +Hardware checksum offloading is supported for TCP and UDP over IPv4/6 frames. +The checksum offloads can be independently configured on RX and TX through +ethtool. + +Hardware offload of unicast and multicast MAC filtering is supported on the +ingress path and permanently enabled. + +Scatter-gather frames are supported on both RX and TX paths. On TX, SG support +is configurable via ethtool; on RX it is always enabled. + +The DPAA2 hardware can process jumbo Ethernet frames of up to 10K bytes. + +The Ethernet driver defines a static flow hashing scheme that distributes +traffic based on a 5-tuple key: src IP, dst IP, IP proto, L4 src port, +L4 dst port. No user configuration is supported for now. + +Hardware specific statistics for the network interface as well as some +non-standard driver stats can be consulted through ethtool -S option. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..67bd87fe6c53 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +=================== +DPAA2 Documentation +=================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + overview + dpio-driver + ethernet-driver diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d638b5a8aadd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst @@ -0,0 +1,405 @@ +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +========================================================= +DPAA2 (Data Path Acceleration Architecture Gen2) Overview +========================================================= + +:Copyright: |copy| 2015 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. +:Copyright: |copy| 2018 NXP + +This document provides an overview of the Freescale DPAA2 architecture +and how it is integrated into the Linux kernel. + +Introduction +============ + +DPAA2 is a hardware architecture designed for high-speeed network +packet processing. DPAA2 consists of sophisticated mechanisms for +processing Ethernet packets, queue management, buffer management, +autonomous L2 switching, virtual Ethernet bridging, and accelerator +(e.g. crypto) sharing. + +A DPAA2 hardware component called the Management Complex (or MC) manages the +DPAA2 hardware resources. The MC provides an object-based abstraction for +software drivers to use the DPAA2 hardware. +The MC uses DPAA2 hardware resources such as queues, buffer pools, and +network ports to create functional objects/devices such as network +interfaces, an L2 switch, or accelerator instances. +The MC provides memory-mapped I/O command interfaces (MC portals) +which DPAA2 software drivers use to operate on DPAA2 objects. + +The diagram below shows an overview of the DPAA2 resource management +architecture:: + + +--------------------------------------+ + | OS | + | DPAA2 drivers | + | | | + +-----------------------------|--------+ + | + | (create,discover,connect + | config,use,destroy) + | + DPAA2 | + +------------------------| mc portal |-+ + | | | + | +- - - - - - - - - - - - -V- - -+ | + | | | | + | | Management Complex (MC) | | + | | | | + | +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -+ | + | | + | Hardware Hardware | + | Resources Objects | + | --------- ------- | + | -queues -DPRC | + | -buffer pools -DPMCP | + | -Eth MACs/ports -DPIO | + | -network interface -DPNI | + | profiles -DPMAC | + | -queue portals -DPBP | + | -MC portals ... | + | ... | + | | + +--------------------------------------+ + + +The MC mediates operations such as create, discover, +connect, configuration, and destroy. Fast-path operations +on data, such as packet transmit/receive, are not mediated by +the MC and are done directly using memory mapped regions in +DPIO objects. + +Overview of DPAA2 Objects +========================= + +The section provides a brief overview of some key DPAA2 objects. +A simple scenario is described illustrating the objects involved +in creating a network interfaces. + +DPRC (Datapath Resource Container) +---------------------------------- + +A DPRC is a container object that holds all the other +types of DPAA2 objects. In the example diagram below there +are 8 objects of 5 types (DPMCP, DPIO, DPBP, DPNI, and DPMAC) +in the container. + +:: + + +---------------------------------------------------------+ + | DPRC | + | | + | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ | + | | DPMCP | | DPIO | | DPBP | | DPNI | | DPMAC | | + | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +---+---+ +---+---+ | + | | DPMCP | | DPIO | | + | +-------+ +-------+ | + | | DPMCP | | + | +-------+ | + | | + +---------------------------------------------------------+ + +From the point of view of an OS, a DPRC behaves similar to a plug and +play bus, like PCI. DPRC commands can be used to enumerate the contents +of the DPRC, discover the hardware objects present (including mappable +regions and interrupts). + +:: + + DPRC.1 (bus) + | + +--+--------+-------+-------+-------+ + | | | | | + DPMCP.1 DPIO.1 DPBP.1 DPNI.1 DPMAC.1 + DPMCP.2 DPIO.2 + DPMCP.3 + +Hardware objects can be created and destroyed dynamically, providing +the ability to hot plug/unplug objects in and out of the DPRC. + +A DPRC has a mappable MMIO region (an MC portal) that can be used +to send MC commands. It has an interrupt for status events (like +hotplug). +All objects in a container share the same hardware "isolation context". +This means that with respect to an IOMMU the isolation granularity +is at the DPRC (container) level, not at the individual object +level. + +DPRCs can be defined statically and populated with objects +via a config file passed to the MC when firmware starts it. + +DPAA2 Objects for an Ethernet Network Interface +----------------------------------------------- + +A typical Ethernet NIC is monolithic-- the NIC device contains TX/RX +queuing mechanisms, configuration mechanisms, buffer management, +physical ports, and interrupts. DPAA2 uses a more granular approach +utilizing multiple hardware objects. Each object provides specialized +functions. Groups of these objects are used by software to provide +Ethernet network interface functionality. This approach provides +efficient use of finite hardware resources, flexibility, and +performance advantages. + +The diagram below shows the objects needed for a simple +network interface configuration on a system with 2 CPUs. + +:: + + +---+---+ +---+---+ + CPU0 CPU1 + +---+---+ +---+---+ + | | + +---+---+ +---+---+ + DPIO DPIO + +---+---+ +---+---+ + \ / + \ / + \ / + +---+---+ + DPNI --- DPBP,DPMCP + +---+---+ + | + | + +---+---+ + DPMAC + +---+---+ + | + port/PHY + +Below the objects are described. For each object a brief description +is provided along with a summary of the kinds of operations the object +supports and a summary of key resources of the object (MMIO regions +and IRQs). + +DPMAC (Datapath Ethernet MAC) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Represents an Ethernet MAC, a hardware device that connects to an Ethernet +PHY and allows physical transmission and reception of Ethernet frames. + +- MMIO regions: none +- IRQs: DPNI link change +- commands: set link up/down, link config, get stats, + IRQ config, enable, reset + +DPNI (Datapath Network Interface) +Contains TX/RX queues, network interface configuration, and RX buffer pool +configuration mechanisms. The TX/RX queues are in memory and are identified +by queue number. + +- MMIO regions: none +- IRQs: link state +- commands: port config, offload config, queue config, + parse/classify config, IRQ config, enable, reset + +DPIO (Datapath I/O) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Provides interfaces to enqueue and dequeue +packets and do hardware buffer pool management operations. The DPAA2 +architecture separates the mechanism to access queues (the DPIO object) +from the queues themselves. The DPIO provides an MMIO interface to +enqueue/dequeue packets. To enqueue something a descriptor is written +to the DPIO MMIO region, which includes the target queue number. +There will typically be one DPIO assigned to each CPU. This allows all +CPUs to simultaneously perform enqueue/dequeued operations. DPIOs are +expected to be shared by different DPAA2 drivers. + +- MMIO regions: queue operations, buffer management +- IRQs: data availability, congestion notification, buffer + pool depletion +- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset + +DPBP (Datapath Buffer Pool) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Represents a hardware buffer pool. + +- MMIO regions: none +- IRQs: none +- commands: enable, reset + +DPMCP (Datapath MC Portal) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Provides an MC command portal. +Used by drivers to send commands to the MC to manage +objects. + +- MMIO regions: MC command portal +- IRQs: command completion +- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset + +Object Connections +================== +Some objects have explicit relationships that must +be configured: + +- DPNI <--> DPMAC +- DPNI <--> DPNI +- DPNI <--> L2-switch-port + + A DPNI must be connected to something such as a DPMAC, + another DPNI, or L2 switch port. The DPNI connection + is made via a DPRC command. + +:: + + +-------+ +-------+ + | DPNI | | DPMAC | + +---+---+ +---+---+ + | | + +==========+ + +- DPNI <--> DPBP + + A network interface requires a 'buffer pool' (DPBP + object) which provides a list of pointers to memory + where received Ethernet data is to be copied. The + Ethernet driver configures the DPBPs associated with + the network interface. + +Interrupts +========== +All interrupts generated by DPAA2 objects are message +interrupts. At the hardware level message interrupts +generated by devices will normally have 3 components-- +1) a non-spoofable 'device-id' expressed on the hardware +bus, 2) an address, 3) a data value. + +In the case of DPAA2 devices/objects, all objects in the +same container/DPRC share the same 'device-id'. +For ARM-based SoC this is the same as the stream ID. + + +DPAA2 Linux Drivers Overview +============================ + +This section provides an overview of the Linux kernel drivers for +DPAA2-- 1) the bus driver and associated "DPAA2 infrastructure" +drivers and 2) functional object drivers (such as Ethernet). + +As described previously, a DPRC is a container that holds the other +types of DPAA2 objects. It is functionally similar to a plug-and-play +bus controller. +Each object in the DPRC is a Linux "device" and is bound to a driver. +The diagram below shows the Linux drivers involved in a networking +scenario and the objects bound to each driver. A brief description +of each driver follows. + +:: + + +------------+ + | OS Network | + | Stack | + +------------+ +------------+ + | Allocator |. . . . . . . | Ethernet | + |(DPMCP,DPBP)| | (DPNI) | + +-.----------+ +---+---+----+ + . . ^ | + . . <data avail, | | <enqueue, + . . tx confirm> | | dequeue> + +-------------+ . | | + | DPRC driver | . +---+---V----+ +---------+ + | (DPRC) | . . . . . .| DPIO driver| | MAC | + +----------+--+ | (DPIO) | | (DPMAC) | + | +------+-----+ +-----+---+ + |<dev add/remove> | | + | | | + +--------+----------+ | +--+---+ + | MC-bus driver | | | PHY | + | | | |driver| + | /bus/fsl-mc | | +--+---+ + +-------------------+ | | + | | + ========================= HARDWARE =========|=================|====== + DPIO | + | | + DPNI---DPBP | + | | + DPMAC | + | | + PHY ---------------+ + ============================================|======================== + +A brief description of each driver is provided below. + +MC-bus driver +------------- +The MC-bus driver is a platform driver and is probed from a +node in the device tree (compatible "fsl,qoriq-mc") passed in by boot +firmware. It is responsible for bootstrapping the DPAA2 kernel +infrastructure. +Key functions include: + +- registering a new bus type named "fsl-mc" with the kernel, + and implementing bus call-backs (e.g. match/uevent/dev_groups) +- implementing APIs for DPAA2 driver registration and for device + add/remove +- creates an MSI IRQ domain +- doing a 'device add' to expose the 'root' DPRC, in turn triggering + a bind of the root DPRC to the DPRC driver + +The binding for the MC-bus device-tree node can be consulted at +*Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/fsl,qoriq-mc.txt*. +The sysfs bind/unbind interfaces for the MC-bus can be consulted at +*Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fsl-mc*. + +DPRC driver +----------- +The DPRC driver is bound to DPRC objects and does runtime management +of a bus instance. It performs the initial bus scan of the DPRC +and handles interrupts for container events such as hot plug by +re-scanning the DPRC. + +Allocator +--------- +Certain objects such as DPMCP and DPBP are generic and fungible, +and are intended to be used by other drivers. For example, +the DPAA2 Ethernet driver needs: + +- DPMCPs to send MC commands, to configure network interfaces +- DPBPs for network buffer pools + +The allocator driver registers for these allocatable object types +and those objects are bound to the allocator when the bus is probed. +The allocator maintains a pool of objects that are available for +allocation by other DPAA2 drivers. + +DPIO driver +----------- +The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects and provides services that allow +other drivers such as the Ethernet driver to enqueue and dequeue data for +their respective objects. +Key services include: + +- data availability notifications +- hardware queuing operations (enqueue and dequeue of data) +- hardware buffer pool management + +To transmit a packet the Ethernet driver puts data on a queue and +invokes a DPIO API. For receive, the Ethernet driver registers +a data availability notification callback. To dequeue a packet +a DPIO API is used. +There is typically one DPIO object per physical CPU for optimum +performance, allowing different CPUs to simultaneously enqueue +and dequeue data. + +The DPIO driver operates on behalf of all DPAA2 drivers +active in the kernel-- Ethernet, crypto, compression, +etc. + +Ethernet driver +--------------- +The Ethernet driver is bound to a DPNI and implements the kernel +interfaces needed to connect the DPAA2 network interface to +the network stack. +Each DPNI corresponds to a Linux network interface. + +MAC driver +---------- +An Ethernet PHY is an off-chip, board specific component and is managed +by the appropriate PHY driver via an mdio bus. The MAC driver +plays a role of being a proxy between the PHY driver and the +MC. It does this proxy via the MC commands to a DPMAC object. +If the PHY driver signals a link change, the MAC driver notifies +the MC via a DPMAC command. If a network interface is brought +up or down, the MC notifies the DPMAC driver via an interrupt and +the driver can take appropriate action. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/gianfar.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/gianfar.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ba1daea7f2e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/freescale/gianfar.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +The Gianfar Ethernet Driver + +Author: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com> +Updated: 2005-07-28 + + +CHECKSUM OFFLOADING + +The eTSEC controller (first included in parts from late 2005 like +the 8548) has the ability to perform TCP, UDP, and IP checksums +in hardware. The Linux kernel only offloads the TCP and UDP +checksums (and always performs the pseudo header checksums), so +the driver only supports checksumming for TCP/IP and UDP/IP +packets. Use ethtool to enable or disable this feature for RX +and TX. + +VLAN + +In order to use VLAN, please consult Linux documentation on +configuring VLANs. The gianfar driver supports hardware insertion and +extraction of VLAN headers, but not filtering. Filtering will be +done by the kernel. + +MULTICASTING + +The gianfar driver supports using the group hash table on the +TSEC (and the extended hash table on the eTSEC) for multicast +filtering. On the eTSEC, the exact-match MAC registers are used +before the hash tables. See Linux documentation on how to join +multicast groups. + +PADDING + +The gianfar driver supports padding received frames with 2 bytes +to align the IP header to a 16-byte boundary, when supported by +hardware. + +ETHTOOL + +The gianfar driver supports the use of ethtool for many +configuration options. You must run ethtool only on currently +open interfaces. See ethtool documentation for details. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5e2839b4ec92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e100.rst @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters +============================================================== + +June 1, 2018 + +Contents +======== + +- In This Release +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Building and Installation +- Driver Configuration Parameters +- Additional Configurations +- Known Issues +- Support + + +In This Release +=============== + +This file describes the Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of +Adapters. This driver includes support for Itanium(R)2-based systems. + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your Intel PRO/100 adapter. + +The following features are now available in supported kernels: + - Native VLANs + - Channel Bonding (teaming) + - SNMP + +Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source: +/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt + + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel +network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +http://www.intel.com/support + +Driver Configuration Parameters +=============================== + +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. + +Rx Descriptors: + Number of receive descriptors. A receive descriptor is a data + structure that describes a receive buffer and its attributes to the network + controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to write + data from the controller to host memory. In the 3.x.x driver the valid range + for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 256. This parameter can be + changed using the command:: + + ethtool -G eth? rx n + + Where n is the number of desired Rx descriptors. + +Tx Descriptors: + Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data + structure that describes a transmit buffer and its attributes to the network + controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to read + data from the host memory to the controller. In the 3.x.x driver the valid + range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 128. This parameter + can be changed using the command:: + + ethtool -G eth? tx n + + Where n is the number of desired Tx descriptors. + +Speed/Duplex: + The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by + default. The ethtool utility can be used as follows to force speed/duplex.:: + + ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half} + + NOTE: setting the speed/duplex to incorrect values will cause the link to + fail. + +Event Log Message Level: + The driver uses the message level flag to log events + to syslog. The message level can be set at driver load time. It can also be + set using the command:: + + ethtool -s eth? msglvl n + + +Additional Configurations +========================= + +Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions +------------------------------------------------- + +Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started +is distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves +adding an alias line to `/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf` as well as editing other +system startup scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux +distributions ship with tools to make these changes for you. To learn +the proper way to configure a network device for your system, refer to +your distribution documentation. If during this process you are asked +for the driver or module name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for +the Intel PRO/100 Family of Adapters is e100. + +As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters +(eth0 and eth1), add the following to a configuration file in +/etc/modprobe.d/:: + + alias eth0 e100 + alias eth1 e100 + +Viewing Link Messages +--------------------- + +In order to see link messages and other Intel driver information on your +console, you must set the dmesg level up to six. This can be done by +entering the following on the command line before loading the e100 +driver:: + + dmesg -n 6 + +If you wish to see all messages issued by the driver, including debug +messages, set the dmesg level to eight. + +NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. + +ethtool +------- + +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool +version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. + +The latest release of ethtool can be found from +https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + +Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) +--------------------------- +WoL is provided through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on +enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be +enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this +driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be loaded +when shutting down or rebooting the system. + +NAPI +---- + +NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e100 driver. + +See https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi for more +information on NAPI. + +Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network +------------------------------------------------------ + +Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have one +system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain +(non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces +will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system. +This results in unbalanced receive traffic. + +If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP +filtering by + +(1) entering:: + + echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter + + (this only works if your kernel's version is higher than 2.4.5), or + +(2) installing the interfaces in separate broadcast domains (either + in different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs). + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: +http://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: +http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6379d4d20771 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000.rst @@ -0,0 +1,462 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection +=========================================================== + +Intel Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999 - 2013 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Command Line Parameters +- Speed and Duplex Configuration +- Additional Configurations +- Support + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: + + http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/idguide.htm + +For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following +website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the +networking link on the left to search for your adapter: + + http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/home.htm + +Command Line Parameters +======================= + +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. + +NOTES: + For more information about the AutoNeg, Duplex, and Speed + parameters, see the "Speed and Duplex Configuration" section in + this document. + + For more information about the InterruptThrottleRate, + RxIntDelay, TxIntDelay, RxAbsIntDelay, and TxAbsIntDelay + parameters, see the application note at: + http://www.intel.com/design/network/applnots/ap450.htm + +AutoNeg +------- + +(Supported only on adapters with copper connections) + +:Valid Range: 0x01-0x0F, 0x20-0x2F +:Default Value: 0x2F + +This parameter is a bit-mask that specifies the speed and duplex settings +advertised by the adapter. When this parameter is used, the Speed and +Duplex parameters must not be specified. + +NOTE: + Refer to the Speed and Duplex section of this readme for more + information on the AutoNeg parameter. + +Duplex +------ + +(Supported only on adapters with copper connections) + +:Valid Range: 0-2 (0=auto-negotiate, 1=half, 2=full) +:Default Value: 0 + +This defines the direction in which data is allowed to flow. Can be +either one or two-directional. If both Duplex and the link partner are +set to auto-negotiate, the board auto-detects the correct duplex. If the +link partner is forced (either full or half), Duplex defaults to half- +duplex. + +FlowControl +----------- + +:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx) +:Default Value: Reads flow control settings from the EEPROM + +This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) +to Ethernet PAUSE frames. + +InterruptThrottleRate +--------------------- + +(not supported on Intel(R) 82542, 82543 or 82544-based adapters) + +:Valid Range: + 0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative, + 4=simplified balancing) +:Default Value: 3 + +The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter +will generate for incoming packets. It does this by writing a value to the +adapter that is based on the maximum amount of interrupts that the adapter +will generate per second. + +Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100 +will program the adapter to send out a maximum of that many interrupts +per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt +load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load, +but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly. + +The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static +InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for +all traffic types,but lacking in small packet performance and latency. +The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and +for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented. + +Since 7.3.x, the driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which +it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic +that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last +timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value +for that traffic. + +The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into +classes. Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is +adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined: +"Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency", +for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small +packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or +minimal traffic. + +In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to 4000 +for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in the "Low +latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is increased +stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most applications. + +For situations where low latency is vital such as cluster or +grid computing, the algorithm can reduce latency even more when +InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates +the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to +70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency". + +In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and +RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the +interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the +traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could +be as high as 8000. + +Setting InterruptThrottleRate to 0 turns off any interrupt moderation +and may improve small packet latency, but is generally not suitable +for bulk throughput traffic. + +NOTE: + InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and + RxAbsIntDelay parameters. In other words, minimizing the receive + and/or transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to + generate more interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate + allows. + +CAUTION: + If you are using the Intel(R) PRO/1000 CT Network Connection + (controller 82547), setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value + greater than 75,000, may hang (stop transmitting) adapters + under certain network conditions. If this occurs a NETDEV + WATCHDOG message is logged in the system event log. In + addition, the controller is automatically reset, restoring + the network connection. To eliminate the potential for the + hang, ensure that InterruptThrottleRate is set no greater + than 75,000 and is not set to 0. + +NOTE: + When e1000 is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters + are in use simultaneously, the CPU utilization may increase non- + linearly. In order to limit the CPU utilization without impacting + the overall throughput, we recommend that you load the driver as + follows:: + + modprobe e1000 InterruptThrottleRate=3000,3000,3000 + + This sets the InterruptThrottleRate to 3000 interrupts/sec for + the first, second, and third instances of the driver. The range + of 2000 to 3000 interrupts per second works on a majority of + systems and is a good starting point, but the optimal value will + be platform-specific. If CPU utilization is not a concern, use + RX_POLLING (NAPI) and default driver settings. + +RxDescriptors +------------- + +:Valid Range: + - 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters + - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters +:Default Value: 256 + +This value specifies the number of receive buffer descriptors allocated +by the driver. Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more +incoming packets, at the expense of increased system memory utilization. + +Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for each +descriptor and can be either 2048, 4096, 8192, or 16384 bytes, depending +on the MTU setting. The maximum MTU size is 16110. + +NOTE: + MTU designates the frame size. It only needs to be set for Jumbo + Frames. Depending on the available system resources, the request + for a higher number of receive descriptors may be denied. In this + case, use a lower number. + +RxIntDelay +---------- + +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 0 + +This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024 +microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if +properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing this value adds +extra latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput +of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value +may be set too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive +descriptors. + +CAUTION: + When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may + hang (stop transmitting) under certain network conditions. If + this occurs a NETDEV WATCHDOG message is logged in the system + event log. In addition, the controller is automatically reset, + restoring the network connection. To eliminate the potential + for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0. + +RxAbsIntDelay +------------- + +(This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.) + +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 128 + +This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a +receive interrupt is generated. Useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero, +this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial +packet is received within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, +along with RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network +conditions. + +Speed +----- + +(This parameter is supported only on adapters with copper connections.) + +:Valid Settings: 0, 10, 100, 1000 +:Default Value: 0 (auto-negotiate at all supported speeds) + +Speed forces the line speed to the specified value in megabits per second +(Mbps). If this parameter is not specified or is set to 0 and the link +partner is set to auto-negotiate, the board will auto-detect the correct +speed. Duplex should also be set when Speed is set to either 10 or 100. + +TxDescriptors +------------- + +:Valid Range: + - 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters + - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters +:Default Value: 256 + +This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver. +Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each +descriptor is 16 bytes. + +NOTE: + Depending on the available system resources, the request for a + higher number of transmit descriptors may be denied. In this case, + use a lower number. + +TxIntDelay +---------- + +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 8 + +This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of +1.024 microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU +efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. If the +system is reporting dropped transmits, this value may be set too high +causing the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors. + +TxAbsIntDelay +------------- + +(This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.) + +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 32 + +This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a +transmit interrupt is generated. Useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero, +this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial +packet is sent on the wire within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, +along with TxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific +network conditions. + +XsumRX +------ + +(This parameter is NOT supported on the 82542-based adapter.) + +:Valid Range: 0-1 +:Default Value: 1 + +A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum +offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware. + +Copybreak +--------- + +:Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) +:Default Value: 256 +:Usage: modprobe e1000.ko copybreak=128 + +Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX +buffer before handing it up the stack. + +This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a +single (not 1,1,1 etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and +it is also available during runtime at +/sys/module/e1000/parameters/copybreak + +SmartPowerDownEnable +-------------------- + +:Valid Range: 0-1 +:Default Value: 0 (disabled) + +Allows PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can turn off +this parameter in supported chipsets. + +Speed and Duplex Configuration +============================== + +Three keywords are used to control the speed and duplex configuration. +These keywords are Speed, Duplex, and AutoNeg. + +If the board uses a fiber interface, these keywords are ignored, and the +fiber interface board only links at 1000 Mbps full-duplex. + +For copper-based boards, the keywords interact as follows: + +- The default operation is auto-negotiate. The board advertises all + supported speed and duplex combinations, and it links at the highest + common speed and duplex mode IF the link partner is set to auto-negotiate. + +- If Speed = 1000, limited auto-negotiation is enabled and only 1000 Mbps + is advertised (The 1000BaseT spec requires auto-negotiation.) + +- If Speed = 10 or 100, then both Speed and Duplex should be set. Auto- + negotiation is disabled, and the AutoNeg parameter is ignored. Partner + SHOULD also be forced. + +The AutoNeg parameter is used when more control is required over the +auto-negotiation process. It should be used when you wish to control which +speed and duplex combinations are advertised during the auto-negotiation +process. + +The parameter may be specified as either a decimal or hexadecimal value as +determined by the bitmap below. + +============== ====== ====== ======= ======= ====== ====== ======= ====== +Bit position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +Decimal Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 +Hex value 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 +Speed (Mbps) N/A N/A 1000 N/A 100 100 10 10 +Duplex Full Full Half Full Half +============== ====== ====== ======= ======= ====== ====== ======= ====== + +Some examples of using AutoNeg:: + + modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x01 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half) + modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=1 (Same as above) + modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x02 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Full) + modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x03 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half or 10 Full) + modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x04 (Restricts autonegotiation to 100 Half) + modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x05 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half or 100 + Half) + modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x020 (Restricts autonegotiation to 1000 Full) + modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=32 (Same as above) + +Note that when this parameter is used, Speed and Duplex must not be specified. + +If the link partner is forced to a specific speed and duplex, then this +parameter should not be used. Instead, use the Speed and Duplex parameters +previously mentioned to force the adapter to the same speed and duplex. + +Additional Configurations +========================= + +Jumbo Frames +------------ + + Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than + the default of 1500. Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. + For example:: + + ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up + + This setting is not saved across reboots. It can be made permanent if + you add:: + + MTU=9000 + + to the file /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>. This example + applies to the Red Hat distributions; other distributions may store this + setting in a different location. + +Notes: + Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames + environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer + size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help. + See the specific application manual and /usr/src/linux*/Documentation/ + networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details. + + - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16110. This value coincides + with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128. + + - Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in + poor performance or loss of link. + + - Adapters based on the Intel(R) 82542 and 82573V/E controller do not + support Jumbo Frames. These correspond to the following product names:: + + Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter + Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection + +ethtool +------- + + The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool + version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. + + The latest release of ethtool can be found from + https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + +Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) +--------------------------- + + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. + + WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. + For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000 driver must be + loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. + +Support +======= + +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + + http://support.intel.com + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + + http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported +kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related +to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..33554e5416c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/e1000e.rst @@ -0,0 +1,382 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection +====================================================== + +Intel Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 2008-2018 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Command Line Parameters +- Additional Configurations +- Support + + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel +network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +https://www.intel.com/support + + +Command Line Parameters +======================= +If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used +by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this +syntax:: + + modprobe e1000e [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] + +There needs to be a <VAL#> for each network port in the system supported by +this driver. The values will be applied to each instance, in function order. +For example:: + + modprobe e1000e InterruptThrottleRate=16000,16000 + +In this case, there are two network ports supported by e1000e in the system. +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. + +NOTE: A descriptor describes a data buffer and attributes related to the data +buffer. This information is accessed by the hardware. + +InterruptThrottleRate +--------------------- +:Valid Range: 0,1,3,4,100-100000 +:Default Value: 3 + +Interrupt Throttle Rate controls the number of interrupts each interrupt +vector can generate per second. Increasing ITR lowers latency at the cost of +increased CPU utilization, though it may help throughput in some circumstances. + +Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100 +will program the adapter to send out a maximum of that many interrupts +per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt +load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load, +but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly. + +The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static +InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for +all traffic types, but lacking in small packet performance and latency. +The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and +for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented. + +The driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which +it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic +that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last +timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value +for that traffic. + +The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into +classes. Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is +adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined: +"Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency", +for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small +packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or +minimal traffic. + + - 0: Off + Turns off any interrupt moderation and may improve small packet latency. + However, this is generally not suitable for bulk throughput traffic due + to the increased CPU utilization of the higher interrupt rate. + - 1: Dynamic mode + This mode attempts to moderate interrupts per vector while maintaining + very low latency. This can sometimes cause extra CPU utilization. If + planning on deploying e1000e in a latency sensitive environment, this + parameter should be considered. + - 3: Dynamic Conservative mode (default) + In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to + 4000 for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in + the "Low latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is + increased stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most + applications. + - 4: Simplified Balancing mode + In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and + RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the + interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the + traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could + be as high as 8000. + - 100-100000: + Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100 + will program the adapter to send at most that many interrupts per second, + even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt load on the + system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load, but will increase + latency as packets are not processed as quickly. + +NOTE: InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and +RxAbsIntDelay parameters. In other words, minimizing the receive and/or +transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to generate more +interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate allows. + +RxIntDelay +---------- +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 0 + +This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024 +microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if +properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing this value adds extra +latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput of TCP +traffic. If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value may be set +too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive descriptors. + +CAUTION: When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may hang +(stop transmitting) under certain network conditions. If this occurs a NETDEV +WATCHDOG message is logged in the system event log. In addition, the +controller is automatically reset, restoring the network connection. To +eliminate the potential for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0. + +RxAbsIntDelay +------------- +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 8 + +This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a +receive interrupt is generated. This value ensures that an interrupt is +generated after the initial packet is received within the set amount of time, +which is useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero. Proper tuning, along with +RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network conditions. + +TxIntDelay +---------- +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 8 + +This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of 1.024 +microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if +properly tuned for specific network traffic. If the system is reporting +dropped transmits, this value may be set too high causing the driver to run +out of available transmit descriptors. + +TxAbsIntDelay +------------- +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 32 + +This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a +transmit interrupt is generated. It is useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero. +It ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial Packet is sent on +the wire within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, along with TxIntDelay, +may improve traffic throughput in specific network conditions. + +copybreak +--------- +:Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) +:Default Value: 256 + +The driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh receive +buffer before handing it up the stack. +This parameter differs from other parameters because it is a single (not 1,1,1 +etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and it is also available +during runtime at /sys/module/e1000e/parameters/copybreak. + +To use copybreak, type:: + + modprobe e1000e.ko copybreak=128 + +SmartPowerDownEnable +-------------------- +:Valid Range: 0,1 +:Default Value: 0 (disabled) + +Allows the PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can turn off this +parameter in supported chipsets. + +KumeranLockLoss +--------------- +:Valid Range: 0,1 +:Default Value: 1 (enabled) + +This workaround skips resetting the PHY at shutdown for the initial silicon +releases of ICH8 systems. + +IntMode +------- +:Valid Range: 0-2 +:Default Value: 0 + + +-------+----------------+ + | Value | Interrupt Mode | + +=======+================+ + | 0 | Legacy | + +-------+----------------+ + | 1 | MSI | + +-------+----------------+ + | 2 | MSI-X | + +-------+----------------+ + +IntMode allows load time control over the type of interrupt registered for by +the driver. MSI-X is required for multiple queue support, and some kernels and +combinations of kernel .config options will force a lower level of interrupt +support. + +This command will show different values for each type of interrupt:: + + cat /proc/interrupts + +CrcStripping +------------ +:Valid Range: 0,1 +:Default Value: 1 (enabled) + +Strip the CRC from received packets before sending up the network stack. If +you have a machine with a BMC enabled but cannot receive IPMI traffic after +loading or enabling the driver, try disabling this feature. + +WriteProtectNVM +--------------- +:Valid Range: 0,1 +:Default Value: 1 (enabled) + +If set to 1, configure the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the +GbE region in the ICHx NVM (in order to prevent accidental corruption of the +NVM). This feature can be disabled by setting the parameter to 0 during initial +driver load. + +NOTE: The machine must be power cycled (full off/on) when enabling NVM writes +via setting the parameter to zero. Once the NVM has been locked (via the +parameter at 1 when the driver loads) it cannot be unlocked except via power +cycle. + +Debug +----- +:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all) +:Default Value: 0 + +This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the system logs. + + +Additional Features and Configurations +====================================== + +Jumbo Frames +------------ +Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) +to a value larger than the default value of 1500. + +Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the +following where <x> is the interface number:: + + ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up + +Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows:: + + ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x> + ip link set up dev eth<x> + +This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made +permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file: + +- For RHEL: /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x> +- For SLES: /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file> + +NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 8996. This value coincides +with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9018 bytes. + +NOTE: Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in +poor performance or loss of link. + +NOTE: The following adapters limit Jumbo Frames sized packets to a maximum of +4088 bytes: + + - Intel(R) 82578DM Gigabit Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82577LM Gigabit Network Connection + +The following adapters do not support Jumbo Frames: + + - Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter + - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82562G 10/100 Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82562G-2 10/100 Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82562GT 10/100 Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82562GT-2 10/100 Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82562V 10/100 Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82562V-2 10/100 Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82566DC Gigabit Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82566DC-2 Gigabit Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82566DM Gigabit Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82566MC Gigabit Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82566MM Gigabit Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82567V-3 Gigabit Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82577LC Gigabit Network Connection + - Intel(R) 82578DC Gigabit Network Connection + +NOTE: Jumbo Frames cannot be configured on an 82579-based Network device if +MACSec is enabled on the system. + + +ethtool +------- +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool +version is required for this functionality. Download it at: + +https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + +NOTE: When validating enable/disable tests on some parts (for example, 82578), +it is necessary to add a few seconds between tests when working with ethtool. + + +Speed and Duplex Configuration +------------------------------ +In addressing speed and duplex configuration issues, you need to distinguish +between copper-based adapters and fiber-based adapters. + +In the default mode, an Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using copper +connections will attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner to determine +the best setting. If the adapter cannot establish link with the link partner +using auto-negotiation, you may need to manually configure the adapter and link +partner to identical settings to establish link and pass packets. This should +only be needed when attempting to link with an older switch that does not +support auto-negotiation or one that has been forced to a specific speed or +duplex mode. Your link partner must match the setting you choose. 1 Gbps speeds +and higher cannot be forced. Use the autonegotiation advertising setting to +manually set devices for 1 Gbps and higher. + +Speed, duplex, and autonegotiation advertising are configured through the +ethtool* utility. + +Caution: Only experienced network administrators should force speed and duplex +or change autonegotiation advertising manually. The settings at the switch must +always match the adapter settings. Adapter performance may suffer or your +adapter may not operate if you configure the adapter differently from your +switch. + +An Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using fiber-based connections, however, +will not attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner since those adapters +operate only in full duplex and only at their native speed. + + +Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) +--------------------------- +WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. + +WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For +this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000e driver must be loaded +prior to shutting down or suspending the system. + +NOTE: Wake on LAN is only supported on port A for the following devices: +- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Network Connection +- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Connection +- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter +- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Dual Port Server Adapter +- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Quad Port Server Adapter +- Intel(R) Gigabit PT Quad Port Server ExpressModule + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bf5e5942f28d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/fm10k.rst @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Multi-host Controller +============================================================== + +August 20, 2018 +Copyright(c) 2015-2018 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Additional Configurations +- Performance Tuning +- Known Issues +- Support + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +The driver in this release is compatible with devices based on the Intel(R) +Ethernet Multi-host Controller. + +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel +network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +http://www.intel.com/support + + +Flow Control +------------ +The Intel(R) Ethernet Switch Host Interface Driver does not support Flow +Control. It will not send pause frames. This may result in dropped frames. + + +Virtual Functions (VFs) +----------------------- +Use sysfs to enable VFs. +Valid Range: 0-64 + +For example:: + + echo $num_vf_enabled > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs //enable VFs + echo 0 > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs //disable VFs + +NOTE: Neither the device nor the driver control how VFs are mapped into config +space. Bus layout will vary by operating system. On operating systems that +support it, you can check sysfs to find the mapping. + +NOTE: When SR-IOV mode is enabled, hardware VLAN filtering and VLAN tag +stripping/insertion will remain enabled. Please remove the old VLAN filter +before the new VLAN filter is added. For example:: + + ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 100 // set vlan 100 for VF 0 + ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 0 // Delete vlan 100 + ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 200 // set a new vlan 200 for VF 0 + + +Additional Features and Configurations +====================================== + +Jumbo Frames +------------ +Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) +to a value larger than the default value of 1500. + +Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the +following where <x> is the interface number:: + + ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up + +Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows:: + + ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x> + ip link set up dev eth<x> + +This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made +permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file: + +- For RHEL: /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x> +- For SLES: /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file> + +NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 15342. This value coincides +with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 15364 bytes. + +NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive +each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when +allocating receive packets. + + +Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO +-------------------------------- +The driver supports the in-kernel software implementation of GRO. GRO has +shown that by coalescing Rx traffic into larger chunks of data, CPU +utilization can be significantly reduced when under large Rx load. GRO is an +evolution of the previously-used LRO interface. GRO is able to coalesce +other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that +are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI. + + + +Supported ethtool Commands and Options for Filtering +---------------------------------------------------- +-n --show-nfc + Retrieves the receive network flow classification configurations. + +rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 + Retrieves the hash options for the specified network traffic type. + +-N --config-nfc + Configures the receive network flow classification. + +rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 m|v|t|s|d|f|n|r + Configures the hash options for the specified network traffic type. + +- udp4: UDP over IPv4 +- udp6: UDP over IPv6 +- f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the rx packet. +- n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the rx packet. + + +Known Issues/Troubleshooting +============================ + +Enabling SR-IOV in a 64-bit Microsoft* Windows Server* 2012/R2 guest OS under Linux KVM +--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM. This +includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices based on +the Intel Ethernet Controller XL710. + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0cc16c525d10 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/i40e.rst @@ -0,0 +1,770 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series +================================================================== + +Intel 40 Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Overview +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director +- Additional Configurations +- Known Issues +- Support + + +Driver information can be obtained using ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig. +Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section Additional +Configurations later in this document. + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use +with Linux. + + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +The driver is compatible with devices based on the following: + + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X710 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection X722 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XXV710 + +For the best performance, make sure the latest NVM/FW is installed on your +device. + +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest NVM/FW +images and Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +https://www.intel.com/support + +SFP+ and QSFP+ Devices +---------------------- +For information about supported media, refer to this document: +https://www.intel.com/content/dam/www/public/us/en/documents/release-notes/xl710-ethernet-controller-feature-matrix.pdf + +NOTE: Some adapters based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series only +support Intel Ethernet Optics modules. On these adapters, other modules are not +supported and will not function. In all cases Intel recommends using Intel +Ethernet Optics; other modules may function but are not validated by Intel. +Contact Intel for supported media types. + +NOTE: For connections based on Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series, support +is dependent on your system board. Please see your vendor for details. + +NOTE: In systems that do not have adequate airflow to cool the adapter and +optical modules, you must use high temperature optical modules. + +Virtual Functions (VFs) +----------------------- +Use sysfs to enable VFs. For example:: + + #echo $num_vf_enabled > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs #enable VFs + #echo 0 > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs #disable VFs + +For example, the following instructions will configure PF eth0 and the first VF +on VLAN 10:: + + $ ip link set dev eth0 vf 0 vlan 10 + +VLAN Tag Packet Steering +------------------------ +Allows you to send all packets with a specific VLAN tag to a particular SR-IOV +virtual function (VF). Further, this feature allows you to designate a +particular VF as trusted, and allows that trusted VF to request selective +promiscuous mode on the Physical Function (PF). + +To set a VF as trusted or untrusted, enter the following command in the +Hypervisor:: + + # ip link set dev eth0 vf 1 trust [on|off] + +Once the VF is designated as trusted, use the following commands in the VM to +set the VF to promiscuous mode. + +:: + + For promiscuous all: + #ip link set eth2 promisc on + Where eth2 is a VF interface in the VM + + For promiscuous Multicast: + #ip link set eth2 allmulticast on + Where eth2 is a VF interface in the VM + +NOTE: By default, the ethtool priv-flag vf-true-promisc-support is set to +"off",meaning that promiscuous mode for the VF will be limited. To set the +promiscuous mode for the VF to true promiscuous and allow the VF to see all +ingress traffic, use the following command:: + + #ethtool -set-priv-flags p261p1 vf-true-promisc-support on + +The vf-true-promisc-support priv-flag does not enable promiscuous mode; rather, +it designates which type of promiscuous mode (limited or true) you will get +when you enable promiscuous mode using the ip link commands above. Note that +this is a global setting that affects the entire device. However,the +vf-true-promisc-support priv-flag is only exposed to the first PF of the +device. The PF remains in limited promiscuous mode (unless it is in MFP mode) +regardless of the vf-true-promisc-support setting. + +Now add a VLAN interface on the VF interface:: + + #ip link add link eth2 name eth2.100 type vlan id 100 + +Note that the order in which you set the VF to promiscuous mode and add the +VLAN interface does not matter (you can do either first). The end result in +this example is that the VF will get all traffic that is tagged with VLAN 100. + +Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director +------------------------------- +The Intel Ethernet Flow Director performs the following tasks: + +- Directs receive packets according to their flows to different queues. +- Enables tight control on routing a flow in the platform. +- Matches flows and CPU cores for flow affinity. +- Supports multiple parameters for flexible flow classification and load + balancing (in SFP mode only). + +NOTE: The Linux i40e driver supports the following flow types: IPv4, TCPv4, and +UDPv4. For a given flow type, it supports valid combinations of IP addresses +(source or destination) and UDP/TCP ports (source and destination). For +example, you can supply only a source IP address, a source IP address and a +destination port, or any combination of one or more of these four parameters. + +NOTE: The Linux i40e driver allows you to filter traffic based on a +user-defined flexible two-byte pattern and offset by using the ethtool user-def +and mask fields. Only L3 and L4 flow types are supported for user-defined +flexible filters. For a given flow type, you must clear all Intel Ethernet Flow +Director filters before changing the input set (for that flow type). + +To enable or disable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director:: + + # ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off> + +When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programmed filters are flushed from +the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must be re-added when ntuple +is re-enabled. + +To add a filter that directs packet to queue 2, use -U or -N switch:: + + # ethtool -N ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \ + 192.168.10.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 2 [loc 1] + +To set a filter using only the source and destination IP address:: + + # ethtool -N ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \ + 192.168.10.2 action 2 [loc 1] + +To see the list of filters currently present:: + + # ethtool <-u|-n> ethX + +Application Targeted Routing (ATR) Perfect Filters +-------------------------------------------------- +ATR is enabled by default when the kernel is in multiple transmit queue mode. +An ATR Intel Ethernet Flow Director filter rule is added when a TCP-IP flow +starts and is deleted when the flow ends. When a TCP-IP Intel Ethernet Flow +Director rule is added from ethtool (Sideband filter), ATR is turned off by the +driver. To re-enable ATR, the sideband can be disabled with the ethtool -K +option. For example:: + + ethtool –K [adapter] ntuple [off|on] + +If sideband is re-enabled after ATR is re-enabled, ATR remains enabled until a +TCP-IP flow is added. When all TCP-IP sideband rules are deleted, ATR is +automatically re-enabled. + +Packets that match the ATR rules are counted in fdir_atr_match stats in +ethtool, which also can be used to verify whether ATR rules still exist. + +Sideband Perfect Filters +------------------------ +Sideband Perfect Filters are used to direct traffic that matches specified +characteristics. They are enabled through ethtool's ntuple interface. To add a +new filter use the following command:: + + ethtool -U <device> flow-type <type> src-ip <ip> dst-ip <ip> src-port <port> \ + dst-port <port> action <queue> + +Where: + <device> - the ethernet device to program + <type> - can be ip4, tcp4, udp4, or sctp4 + <ip> - the ip address to match on + <port> - the port number to match on + <queue> - the queue to direct traffic towards (-1 discards matching traffic) + +Use the following command to display all of the active filters:: + + ethtool -u <device> + +Use the following command to delete a filter:: + + ethtool -U <device> delete <N> + +Where <N> is the filter id displayed when printing all the active filters, and +may also have been specified using "loc <N>" when adding the filter. + +The following example matches TCP traffic sent from 192.168.0.1, port 5300, +directed to 192.168.0.5, port 80, and sends it to queue 7:: + + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 \ + src-port 5300 dst-port 80 action 7 + +For each flow-type, the programmed filters must all have the same matching +input set. For example, issuing the following two commands is acceptable:: + + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7 + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10 + +Issuing the next two commands, however, is not acceptable, since the first +specifies src-ip and the second specifies dst-ip:: + + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7 + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10 + +The second command will fail with an error. You may program multiple filters +with the same fields, using different values, but, on one device, you may not +program two tcp4 filters with different matching fields. + +Matching on a sub-portion of a field is not supported by the i40e driver, thus +partial mask fields are not supported. + +The driver also supports matching user-defined data within the packet payload. +This flexible data is specified using the "user-def" field of the ethtool +command in the following way: + ++----------------------------+--------------------------+ +| 31 28 24 20 16 | 15 12 8 4 0 | ++----------------------------+--------------------------+ +| offset into packet payload | 2 bytes of flexible data | ++----------------------------+--------------------------+ + +For example, + +:: + + ... user-def 0x4FFFF ... + +tells the filter to look 4 bytes into the payload and match that value against +0xFFFF. The offset is based on the beginning of the payload, and not the +beginning of the packet. Thus + +:: + + flow-type tcp4 ... user-def 0x8BEAF ... + +would match TCP/IPv4 packets which have the value 0xBEAF 8 bytes into the +TCP/IPv4 payload. + +Note that ICMP headers are parsed as 4 bytes of header and 4 bytes of payload. +Thus to match the first byte of the payload, you must actually add 4 bytes to +the offset. Also note that ip4 filters match both ICMP frames as well as raw +(unknown) ip4 frames, where the payload will be the L3 payload of the IP4 frame. + +The maximum offset is 64. The hardware will only read up to 64 bytes of data +from the payload. The offset must be even because the flexible data is 2 bytes +long and must be aligned to byte 0 of the packet payload. + +The user-defined flexible offset is also considered part of the input set and +cannot be programmed separately for multiple filters of the same type. However, +the flexible data is not part of the input set and multiple filters may use the +same offset but match against different data. + +To create filters that direct traffic to a specific Virtual Function, use the +"action" parameter. Specify the action as a 64 bit value, where the lower 32 +bits represents the queue number, while the next 8 bits represent which VF. +Note that 0 is the PF, so the VF identifier is offset by 1. For example:: + + ... action 0x800000002 ... + +specifies to direct traffic to Virtual Function 7 (8 minus 1) into queue 2 of +that VF. + +Note that these filters will not break internal routing rules, and will not +route traffic that otherwise would not have been sent to the specified Virtual +Function. + +Setting the link-down-on-close Private Flag +------------------------------------------- +When the link-down-on-close private flag is set to "on", the port's link will +go down when the interface is brought down using the ifconfig ethX down command. + +Use ethtool to view and set link-down-on-close, as follows:: + + ethtool --show-priv-flags ethX + ethtool --set-priv-flags ethX link-down-on-close [on|off] + +Viewing Link Messages +--------------------- +Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is +restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on +your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following:: + + dmesg -n 8 + +NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. + +Jumbo Frames +------------ +Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) +to a value larger than the default value of 1500. + +Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the +following where <x> is the interface number:: + + ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up + +Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows:: + + ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x> + ip link set up dev eth<x> + +This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made +permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file:: + + /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x> // for RHEL + /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file> // for SLES + +NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9702. This value coincides +with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9728 bytes. + +NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive +each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when +allocating receive packets. + +ethtool +------- +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool +version is required for this functionality. Download it at: +https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + +Supported ethtool Commands and Options for Filtering +---------------------------------------------------- +-n --show-nfc + Retrieves the receive network flow classification configurations. + +rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 + Retrieves the hash options for the specified network traffic type. + +-N --config-nfc + Configures the receive network flow classification. + +rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 m|v|t|s|d|f|n|r... + Configures the hash options for the specified network traffic type. + +udp4 UDP over IPv4 +udp6 UDP over IPv6 + +f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet. +n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet. + +Speed and Duplex Configuration +------------------------------ +In addressing speed and duplex configuration issues, you need to distinguish +between copper-based adapters and fiber-based adapters. + +In the default mode, an Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using copper +connections will attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner to determine +the best setting. If the adapter cannot establish link with the link partner +using auto-negotiation, you may need to manually configure the adapter and link +partner to identical settings to establish link and pass packets. This should +only be needed when attempting to link with an older switch that does not +support auto-negotiation or one that has been forced to a specific speed or +duplex mode. Your link partner must match the setting you choose. 1 Gbps speeds +and higher cannot be forced. Use the autonegotiation advertising setting to +manually set devices for 1 Gbps and higher. + +NOTE: You cannot set the speed for devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet +Network Adapter XXV710 based devices. + +Speed, duplex, and autonegotiation advertising are configured through the +ethtool* utility. + +Caution: Only experienced network administrators should force speed and duplex +or change autonegotiation advertising manually. The settings at the switch must +always match the adapter settings. Adapter performance may suffer or your +adapter may not operate if you configure the adapter differently from your +switch. + +An Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using fiber-based connections, however, +will not attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner since those adapters +operate only in full duplex and only at their native speed. + +NAPI +---- +NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the i40e driver. +For more information on NAPI, see +https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi + +Flow Control +------------ +Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable +receiving and transmitting pause frames for i40e. When transmit is enabled, +pause frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined +threshold. When receive is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time +delay specified when a pause frame is received. + +NOTE: You must have a flow control capable link partner. + +Flow Control is on by default. + +Use ethtool to change the flow control settings. + +To enable or disable Rx or Tx Flow Control:: + + ethtool -A eth? rx <on|off> tx <on|off> + +Note: This command only enables or disables Flow Control if auto-negotiation is +disabled. If auto-negotiation is enabled, this command changes the parameters +used for auto-negotiation with the link partner. + +To enable or disable auto-negotiation:: + + ethtool -s eth? autoneg <on|off> + +Note: Flow Control auto-negotiation is part of link auto-negotiation. Depending +on your device, you may not be able to change the auto-negotiation setting. + +RSS Hash Flow +------------- +Allows you to set the hash bytes per flow type and any combination of one or +more options for Receive Side Scaling (RSS) hash byte configuration. + +:: + + # ethtool -N <dev> rx-flow-hash <type> <option> + +Where <type> is: + tcp4 signifying TCP over IPv4 + udp4 signifying UDP over IPv4 + tcp6 signifying TCP over IPv6 + udp6 signifying UDP over IPv6 +And <option> is one or more of: + s Hash on the IP source address of the Rx packet. + d Hash on the IP destination address of the Rx packet. + f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet. + n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet. + +MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature +---------------------------------- +When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by the +hardware and not transmitted. +NOTE: This feature can be disabled for a specific Virtual Function (VF):: + + ip link set <pf dev> vf <vf id> spoofchk {off|on} + +IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Hardware Clock (PHC) +------------------------------------------------------------ +Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is used to synchronize clocks in a computer +network. PTP support varies among Intel devices that support this driver. Use +"ethtool -T <netdev name>" to get a definitive list of PTP capabilities +supported by the device. + +IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support +--------------------------- +The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN +IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as +"tags," and multiple VLAN IDs are thus referred to as a "tag stack." Tag stacks +allow L2 tunneling and the ability to segregate traffic within a particular +VLAN ID, among other uses. + +The following are examples of how to configure 802.1ad (QinQ):: + + ip link add link eth0 eth0.24 type vlan proto 802.1ad id 24 + ip link add link eth0.24 eth0.24.371 type vlan proto 802.1Q id 371 + +Where "24" and "371" are example VLAN IDs. + +NOTES: + Receive checksum offloads, cloud filters, and VLAN acceleration are not + supported for 802.1ad (QinQ) packets. + +VXLAN and GENEVE Overlay HW Offloading +-------------------------------------- +Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) allows you to extend an L2 network over an L3 +network, which may be useful in a virtualized or cloud environment. Some +Intel(R) Ethernet Network devices perform VXLAN processing, offloading it from +the operating system. This reduces CPU utilization. + +VXLAN offloading is controlled by the Tx and Rx checksum offload options +provided by ethtool. That is, if Tx checksum offload is enabled, and the +adapter has the capability, VXLAN offloading is also enabled. + +Support for VXLAN and GENEVE HW offloading is dependent on kernel support of +the HW offloading features. + +Multiple Functions per Port +--------------------------- +Some adapters based on the Intel Ethernet Controller X710/XL710 support +multiple functions on a single physical port. Configure these functions through +the System Setup/BIOS. + +Minimum TX Bandwidth is the guaranteed minimum data transmission bandwidth, as +a percentage of the full physical port link speed, that the partition will +receive. The bandwidth the partition is awarded will never fall below the level +you specify. + +The range for the minimum bandwidth values is: +1 to ((100 minus # of partitions on the physical port) plus 1) +For example, if a physical port has 4 partitions, the range would be: +1 to ((100 - 4) + 1 = 97) + +The Maximum Bandwidth percentage represents the maximum transmit bandwidth +allocated to the partition as a percentage of the full physical port link +speed. The accepted range of values is 1-100. The value is used as a limiter, +should you chose that any one particular function not be able to consume 100% +of a port's bandwidth (should it be available). The sum of all the values for +Maximum Bandwidth is not restricted, because no more than 100% of a port's +bandwidth can ever be used. + +NOTE: X710/XXV710 devices fail to enable Max VFs (64) when Multiple Functions +per Port (MFP) and SR-IOV are enabled. An error from i40e is logged that says +"add vsi failed for VF N, aq_err 16". To workaround the issue, enable less than +64 virtual functions (VFs). + +Data Center Bridging (DCB) +-------------------------- +DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses +the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8 +different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. It also enables +priority flow control (802.1Qbb) which can limit or eliminate the number of +dropped packets during network stress. Bandwidth can be allocated to each of +these priorities, which is enforced at the hardware level (802.1Qaz). + +Adapter firmware implements LLDP and DCBX protocol agents as per 802.1AB and +802.1Qaz respectively. The firmware based DCBX agent runs in willing mode only +and can accept settings from a DCBX capable peer. Software configuration of +DCBX parameters via dcbtool/lldptool are not supported. + +NOTE: Firmware LLDP can be disabled by setting the private flag disable-fw-lldp. + +The i40e driver implements the DCB netlink interface layer to allow user-space +to communicate with the driver and query DCB configuration for the port. + +NOTE: +The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow +Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is +enabled when setting up DCB on your switch. + +Interrupt Rate Limiting +----------------------- +:Valid Range: 0-235 (0=no limit) + +The Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710 family supports an interrupt rate +limiting mechanism. The user can control, via ethtool, the number of +microseconds between interrupts. + +Syntax:: + + # ethtool -C ethX rx-usecs-high N + +The range of 0-235 microseconds provides an effective range of 4,310 to 250,000 +interrupts per second. The value of rx-usecs-high can be set independently of +rx-usecs and tx-usecs in the same ethtool command, and is also independent of +the adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm. The underlying hardware supports +granularity in 4-microsecond intervals, so adjacent values may result in the +same interrupt rate. + +One possible use case is the following:: + + # ethtool -C ethX adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs-high 20 rx-usecs \ + 5 tx-usecs 5 + +The above command would disable adaptive interrupt moderation, and allow a +maximum of 5 microseconds before indicating a receive or transmit was complete. +However, instead of resulting in as many as 200,000 interrupts per second, it +limits total interrupts per second to 50,000 via the rx-usecs-high parameter. + +Performance Optimization +======================== +Driver defaults are meant to fit a wide variety of workloads, but if further +optimization is required we recommend experimenting with the following settings. + +NOTE: For better performance when processing small (64B) frame sizes, try +enabling Hyper threading in the BIOS in order to increase the number of logical +cores in the system and subsequently increase the number of queues available to +the adapter. + +Virtualized Environments +------------------------ +1. Disable XPS on both ends by using the included virt_perf_default script +or by running the following command as root:: + + for file in `ls /sys/class/net/<ethX>/queues/tx-*/xps_cpus`; + do echo 0 > $file; done + +2. Using the appropriate mechanism (vcpupin) in the vm, pin the cpu's to +individual lcpu's, making sure to use a set of cpu's included in the +device's local_cpulist: /sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/local_cpulist. + +3. Configure as many Rx/Tx queues in the VM as available. Do not rely on +the default setting of 1. + + +Non-virtualized Environments +---------------------------- +Pin the adapter's IRQs to specific cores by disabling the irqbalance service +and using the included set_irq_affinity script. Please see the script's help +text for further options. + +- The following settings will distribute the IRQs across all the cores evenly:: + + # scripts/set_irq_affinity -x all <interface1> , [ <interface2>, ... ] + +- The following settings will distribute the IRQs across all the cores that are + local to the adapter (same NUMA node):: + + # scripts/set_irq_affinity -x local <interface1> ,[ <interface2>, ... ] + +For very CPU intensive workloads, we recommend pinning the IRQs to all cores. + +For IP Forwarding: Disable Adaptive ITR and lower Rx and Tx interrupts per +queue using ethtool. + +- Setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 125 will limit interrupts to about 8000 + interrupts per second per queue. + +:: + + # ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 125 \ + tx-usecs 125 + +For lower CPU utilization: Disable Adaptive ITR and lower Rx and Tx interrupts +per queue using ethtool. + +- Setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 250 will limit interrupts to about 4000 + interrupts per second per queue. + +:: + + # ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 250 \ + tx-usecs 250 + +For lower latency: Disable Adaptive ITR and ITR by setting Rx and Tx to 0 using +ethtool. + +:: + + # ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 0 \ + tx-usecs 0 + +Application Device Queues (ADq) +------------------------------- +Application Device Queues (ADq) allows you to dedicate one or more queues to a +specific application. This can reduce latency for the specified application, +and allow Tx traffic to be rate limited per application. Follow the steps below +to set ADq. + +1. Create traffic classes (TCs). Maximum of 8 TCs can be created per interface. +The shaper bw_rlimit parameter is optional. + +Example: Sets up two tcs, tc0 and tc1, with 16 queues each and max tx rate set +to 1Gbit for tc0 and 3Gbit for tc1. + +:: + + # tc qdisc add dev <interface> root mqprio num_tc 2 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 + queues 16@0 16@16 hw 1 mode channel shaper bw_rlimit min_rate 1Gbit 2Gbit + max_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit + +map: priority mapping for up to 16 priorities to tcs (e.g. map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 +sets priorities 0-3 to use tc0 and 4-7 to use tc1) + +queues: for each tc, <num queues>@<offset> (e.g. queues 16@0 16@16 assigns +16 queues to tc0 at offset 0 and 16 queues to tc1 at offset 16. Max total +number of queues for all tcs is 64 or number of cores, whichever is lower.) + +hw 1 mode channel: ‘channel’ with ‘hw’ set to 1 is a new new hardware +offload mode in mqprio that makes full use of the mqprio options, the +TCs, the queue configurations, and the QoS parameters. + +shaper bw_rlimit: for each tc, sets minimum and maximum bandwidth rates. +Totals must be equal or less than port speed. + +For example: min_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit: Verify bandwidth limit using network +monitoring tools such as ifstat or sar –n DEV [interval] [number of samples] + +2. Enable HW TC offload on interface:: + + # ethtool -K <interface> hw-tc-offload on + +3. Apply TCs to ingress (RX) flow of interface:: + + # tc qdisc add dev <interface> ingress + +NOTES: + - Run all tc commands from the iproute2 <pathtoiproute2>/tc/ directory. + - ADq is not compatible with cloud filters. + - Setting up channels via ethtool (ethtool -L) is not supported when the + TCs are configured using mqprio. + - You must have iproute2 latest version + - NVM version 6.01 or later is required. + - ADq cannot be enabled when any the following features are enabled: Data + Center Bridging (DCB), Multiple Functions per Port (MFP), or Sideband + Filters. + - If another driver (for example, DPDK) has set cloud filters, you cannot + enable ADq. + - Tunnel filters are not supported in ADq. If encapsulated packets do + arrive in non-tunnel mode, filtering will be done on the inner headers. + For example, for VXLAN traffic in non-tunnel mode, PCTYPE is identified + as a VXLAN encapsulated packet, outer headers are ignored. Therefore, + inner headers are matched. + - If a TC filter on a PF matches traffic over a VF (on the PF), that + traffic will be routed to the appropriate queue of the PF, and will + not be passed on the VF. Such traffic will end up getting dropped higher + up in the TCP/IP stack as it does not match PF address data. + - If traffic matches multiple TC filters that point to different TCs, + that traffic will be duplicated and sent to all matching TC queues. + The hardware switch mirrors the packet to a VSI list when multiple + filters are matched. + + +Known Issues/Troubleshooting +============================ + +NOTE: 1 Gb devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection X722 do +not support the following features: + + * Data Center Bridging (DCB) + * QOS + * VMQ + * SR-IOV + * Task Encapsulation offload (VXLAN, NVGRE) + * Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) + * Auto-media detect + +Unexpected Issues when the device driver and DPDK share a device +---------------------------------------------------------------- +Unexpected issues may result when an i40e device is in multi driver mode and +the kernel driver and DPDK driver are sharing the device. This is because +access to the global NIC resources is not synchronized between multiple +drivers. Any change to the global NIC configuration (writing to a global +register, setting global configuration by AQ, or changing switch modes) will +affect all ports and drivers on the device. Loading DPDK with the +"multi-driver" module parameter may mitigate some of the issues. + +TC0 must be enabled when setting up DCB on a switch +--------------------------------------------------- +The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow +Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is +enabled when setting up DCB on your switch. + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f8b42b64eb28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/iavf.rst @@ -0,0 +1,281 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function +================================================================== + +Intel Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 2013-2018 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Additional Configurations +- Known Issues/Troubleshooting +- Support + +This file describes the iavf Linux* Base Driver. This driver was formerly +called i40evf. + +The iavf driver supports the below mentioned virtual function devices and +can only be activated on kernels running the i40e or newer Physical Function +(PF) driver compiled with CONFIG_PCI_IOV. The iavf driver requires +CONFIG_PCI_MSI to be enabled. + +The guest OS loading the iavf driver must support MSI-X interrupts. + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +The driver in this kernel is compatible with devices based on the following: + * Intel(R) XL710 X710 Virtual Function + * Intel(R) X722 Virtual Function + * Intel(R) XXV710 Virtual Function + * Intel(R) Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function + +For the best performance, make sure the latest NVM/FW is installed on your +device. + +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest NVM/FW +images and Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +http://www.intel.com/support + + +Additional Features and Configurations +====================================== + +Viewing Link Messages +--------------------- +Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is +restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on +your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following:: + + dmesg -n 8 + +NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. + +ethtool +------- +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool +version is required for this functionality. Download it at: +https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + +Setting VLAN Tag Stripping +-------------------------- +If you have applications that require Virtual Functions (VFs) to receive +packets with VLAN tags, you can disable VLAN tag stripping for the VF. The +Physical Function (PF) processes requests issued from the VF to enable or +disable VLAN tag stripping. Note that if the PF has assigned a VLAN to a VF, +then requests from that VF to set VLAN tag stripping will be ignored. + +To enable/disable VLAN tag stripping for a VF, issue the following command +from inside the VM in which you are running the VF:: + + ethtool -K <if_name> rxvlan on/off + +or alternatively:: + + ethtool --offload <if_name> rxvlan on/off + +Adaptive Virtual Function +------------------------- +Adaptive Virtual Function (AVF) allows the virtual function driver, or VF, to +adapt to changing feature sets of the physical function driver (PF) with which +it is associated. This allows system administrators to update a PF without +having to update all the VFs associated with it. All AVFs have a single common +device ID and branding string. + +AVFs have a minimum set of features known as "base mode," but may provide +additional features depending on what features are available in the PF with +which the AVF is associated. The following are base mode features: + +- 4 Queue Pairs (QP) and associated Configuration Status Registers (CSRs) + for Tx/Rx. +- i40e descriptors and ring format. +- Descriptor write-back completion. +- 1 control queue, with i40e descriptors, CSRs and ring format. +- 5 MSI-X interrupt vectors and corresponding i40e CSRs. +- 1 Interrupt Throttle Rate (ITR) index. +- 1 Virtual Station Interface (VSI) per VF. +- 1 Traffic Class (TC), TC0 +- Receive Side Scaling (RSS) with 64 entry indirection table and key, + configured through the PF. +- 1 unicast MAC address reserved per VF. +- 16 MAC address filters for each VF. +- Stateless offloads - non-tunneled checksums. +- AVF device ID. +- HW mailbox is used for VF to PF communications (including on Windows). + +IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support +--------------------------- +The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN +IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as +"tags," and multiple VLAN IDs are thus referred to as a "tag stack." Tag stacks +allow L2 tunneling and the ability to segregate traffic within a particular +VLAN ID, among other uses. + +The following are examples of how to configure 802.1ad (QinQ):: + + ip link add link eth0 eth0.24 type vlan proto 802.1ad id 24 + ip link add link eth0.24 eth0.24.371 type vlan proto 802.1Q id 371 + +Where "24" and "371" are example VLAN IDs. + +NOTES: + Receive checksum offloads, cloud filters, and VLAN acceleration are not + supported for 802.1ad (QinQ) packets. + +Application Device Queues (ADq) +------------------------------- +Application Device Queues (ADq) allows you to dedicate one or more queues to a +specific application. This can reduce latency for the specified application, +and allow Tx traffic to be rate limited per application. Follow the steps below +to set ADq. + +1. Create traffic classes (TCs). Maximum of 8 TCs can be created per interface. +The shaper bw_rlimit parameter is optional. + +Example: Sets up two tcs, tc0 and tc1, with 16 queues each and max tx rate set +to 1Gbit for tc0 and 3Gbit for tc1. + +:: + + # tc qdisc add dev <interface> root mqprio num_tc 2 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 + queues 16@0 16@16 hw 1 mode channel shaper bw_rlimit min_rate 1Gbit 2Gbit + max_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit + +map: priority mapping for up to 16 priorities to tcs (e.g. map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 +sets priorities 0-3 to use tc0 and 4-7 to use tc1) + +queues: for each tc, <num queues>@<offset> (e.g. queues 16@0 16@16 assigns +16 queues to tc0 at offset 0 and 16 queues to tc1 at offset 16. Max total +number of queues for all tcs is 64 or number of cores, whichever is lower.) + +hw 1 mode channel: ‘channel’ with ‘hw’ set to 1 is a new new hardware +offload mode in mqprio that makes full use of the mqprio options, the +TCs, the queue configurations, and the QoS parameters. + +shaper bw_rlimit: for each tc, sets minimum and maximum bandwidth rates. +Totals must be equal or less than port speed. + +For example: min_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit: Verify bandwidth limit using network +monitoring tools such as ifstat or sar –n DEV [interval] [number of samples] + +2. Enable HW TC offload on interface:: + + # ethtool -K <interface> hw-tc-offload on + +3. Apply TCs to ingress (RX) flow of interface:: + + # tc qdisc add dev <interface> ingress + +NOTES: + - Run all tc commands from the iproute2 <pathtoiproute2>/tc/ directory. + - ADq is not compatible with cloud filters. + - Setting up channels via ethtool (ethtool -L) is not supported when the TCs + are configured using mqprio. + - You must have iproute2 latest version + - NVM version 6.01 or later is required. + - ADq cannot be enabled when any the following features are enabled: Data + Center Bridging (DCB), Multiple Functions per Port (MFP), or Sideband Filters. + - If another driver (for example, DPDK) has set cloud filters, you cannot + enable ADq. + - Tunnel filters are not supported in ADq. If encapsulated packets do arrive + in non-tunnel mode, filtering will be done on the inner headers. For example, + for VXLAN traffic in non-tunnel mode, PCTYPE is identified as a VXLAN + encapsulated packet, outer headers are ignored. Therefore, inner headers are + matched. + - If a TC filter on a PF matches traffic over a VF (on the PF), that traffic + will be routed to the appropriate queue of the PF, and will not be passed on + the VF. Such traffic will end up getting dropped higher up in the TCP/IP + stack as it does not match PF address data. + - If traffic matches multiple TC filters that point to different TCs, that + traffic will be duplicated and sent to all matching TC queues. The hardware + switch mirrors the packet to a VSI list when multiple filters are matched. + + +Known Issues/Troubleshooting +============================ + +Traffic Is Not Being Passed Between VM and Client +------------------------------------------------- +You may not be able to pass traffic between a client system and a +Virtual Machine (VM) running on a separate host if the Virtual Function +(VF, or Virtual NIC) is not in trusted mode and spoof checking is enabled +on the VF. Note that this situation can occur in any combination of client, +host, and guest operating system. For information on how to set the VF to +trusted mode, refer to the section "VLAN Tag Packet Steering" in this +readme document. For information on setting spoof checking, refer to the +section "MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature" in this readme document. + +Do not unload port driver if VF with active VM is bound to it +------------------------------------------------------------- +Do not unload a port's driver if a Virtual Function (VF) with an active Virtual +Machine (VM) is bound to it. Doing so will cause the port to appear to hang. +Once the VM shuts down, or otherwise releases the VF, the command will complete. + +Virtual machine does not get link +--------------------------------- +If the virtual machine has more than one virtual port assigned to it, and those +virtual ports are bound to different physical ports, you may not get link on +all of the virtual ports. The following command may work around the issue:: + + ethtool -r <PF> + +Where <PF> is the PF interface in the host, for example: p5p1. You may need to +run the command more than once to get link on all virtual ports. + +MAC address of Virtual Function changes unexpectedly +---------------------------------------------------- +If a Virtual Function's MAC address is not assigned in the host, then the VF +(virtual function) driver will use a random MAC address. This random MAC +address may change each time the VF driver is reloaded. You can assign a static +MAC address in the host machine. This static MAC address will survive +a VF driver reload. + +Driver Buffer Overflow Fix +-------------------------- +The fix to resolve CVE-2016-8105, referenced in Intel SA-00069 +https://www.intel.com/content/www/us/en/security-center/advisory/intel-sa-00069.html +is included in this and future versions of the driver. + +Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network +------------------------------------------------------ +Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have one system +on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain (non-partitioned +switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces will respond to IP traffic +for any IP address assigned to the system. This results in unbalanced receive +traffic. + +If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP filtering by +entering:: + + echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter + +NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. The configuration change can be +made permanent by adding the following line to the file /etc/sysctl.conf:: + + net.ipv4.conf.all.arp_filter = 1 + +Another alternative is to install the interfaces in separate broadcast domains +(either in different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs). + +Rx Page Allocation Errors +------------------------- +'Page allocation failure. order:0' errors may occur under stress. +This is caused by the way the Linux kernel reports this stressed condition. + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://support.intel.com + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4d118b827bbb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ice.rst @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Connection E800 Series +=================================================================== + +Intel ice Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 2018 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Enabling the driver +- Support + +The driver in this release supports Intel's E800 Series of products. For +more information, visit Intel's support page at https://support.intel.com. + +Enabling the driver +=================== +The driver is enabled via the standard kernel configuration system, +using the make command:: + + make oldconfig/menuconfig/etc. + +The driver is located in the menu structure at: + + -> Device Drivers + -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y]) + -> Ethernet driver support + -> Intel devices + -> Intel(R) Ethernet Connection E800 Series Support + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ba16b86d5593 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igb.rst @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection +=========================================================== + +Intel Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Command Line Parameters +- Additional Configurations +- Support + + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel +network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +http://www.intel.com/support + + +Command Line Parameters +======================== +If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used +by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this +syntax:: + + modprobe igb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] + +There needs to be a <VAL#> for each network port in the system supported by +this driver. The values will be applied to each instance, in function order. +For example:: + + modprobe igb max_vfs=2,4 + +In this case, there are two network ports supported by igb in the system. + +NOTE: A descriptor describes a data buffer and attributes related to the data +buffer. This information is accessed by the hardware. + +max_vfs +------- +:Valid Range: 0-7 + +This parameter adds support for SR-IOV. It causes the driver to spawn up to +max_vfs worth of virtual functions. If the value is greater than 0 it will +also force the VMDq parameter to be 1 or more. + +The parameters for the driver are referenced by position. Thus, if you have a +dual port adapter, or more than one adapter in your system, and want N virtual +functions per port, you must specify a number for each port with each parameter +separated by a comma. For example:: + + modprobe igb max_vfs=4 + +This will spawn 4 VFs on the first port. + +:: + + modprobe igb max_vfs=2,4 + +This will spawn 2 VFs on the first port and 4 VFs on the second port. + +NOTE: Caution must be used in loading the driver with these parameters. +Depending on your system configuration, number of slots, etc., it is impossible +to predict in all cases where the positions would be on the command line. + +NOTE: Neither the device nor the driver control how VFs are mapped into config +space. Bus layout will vary by operating system. On operating systems that +support it, you can check sysfs to find the mapping. + +NOTE: When either SR-IOV mode or VMDq mode is enabled, hardware VLAN filtering +and VLAN tag stripping/insertion will remain enabled. Please remove the old +VLAN filter before the new VLAN filter is added. For example:: + + ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 100 // set vlan 100 for VF 0 + ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 0 // Delete vlan 100 + ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 200 // set a new vlan 200 for VF 0 + +Debug +----- +:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all) +:Default Value: 0 + +This parameter adjusts the level debug messages displayed in the system logs. + + +Additional Features and Configurations +====================================== + +Jumbo Frames +------------ +Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) +to a value larger than the default value of 1500. + +Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the +following where <x> is the interface number:: + + ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up + +Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows:: + + ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x> + ip link set up dev eth<x> + +This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made +permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file: + +- For RHEL: /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x> +- For SLES: /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file> + +NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9216. This value coincides +with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9234 bytes. + +NOTE: Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in +poor performance or loss of link. + + +ethtool +------- +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool +version is required for this functionality. Download it at: + +https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + + +Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) +--------------------------- +WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. + +WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For +this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the igb driver must be loaded +prior to shutting down or suspending the system. + +NOTE: Wake on LAN is only supported on port A of multi-port devices. Also +Wake On LAN is not supported for the following device: +- Intel(R) Gigabit VT Quad Port Server Adapter + + +Multiqueue +---------- +In this mode, a separate MSI-X vector is allocated for each queue and one for +"other" interrupts such as link status change and errors. All interrupts are +throttled via interrupt moderation. Interrupt moderation must be used to avoid +interrupt storms while the driver is processing one interrupt. The moderation +value should be at least as large as the expected time for the driver to +process an interrupt. Multiqueue is off by default. + +REQUIREMENTS: MSI-X support is required for Multiqueue. If MSI-X is not found, +the system will fallback to MSI or to Legacy interrupts. This driver supports +receive multiqueue on all kernels that support MSI-X. + +NOTE: On some kernels a reboot is required to switch between single queue mode +and multiqueue mode or vice-versa. + + +MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature +---------------------------------- +When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by the +hardware and not transmitted. + +An interrupt is sent to the PF driver notifying it of the spoof attempt. When a +spoofed packet is detected, the PF driver will send the following message to +the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command): +Spoof event(s) detected on VF(n), where n = the VF that attempted to do the +spoofing + + +Setting MAC Address, VLAN and Rate Limit Using IProute2 Tool +------------------------------------------------------------ +You can set a MAC address of a Virtual Function (VF), a default VLAN and the +rate limit using the IProute2 tool. Download the latest version of the +IProute2 tool from Sourceforge if your version does not have all the features +you require. + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a8a9ffa4f8d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/igbvf.rst @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 1G Ethernet +============================================================ + +Intel Gigabit Virtual Function Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Additional Configurations +- Support + +This driver supports Intel 82576-based virtual function devices-based virtual +function devices that can only be activated on kernels that support SR-IOV. + +SR-IOV requires the correct platform and OS support. + +The guest OS loading this driver must support MSI-X interrupts. + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use +with Linux. + +Driver information can be obtained using ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig. +Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section Additional +Configurations later in this document. + +NOTE: There is a limit of a total of 32 shared VLANs to 1 or more VFs. + + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel +network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +http://www.intel.com/support + + +Additional Features and Configurations +====================================== + +ethtool +------- +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool +version is required for this functionality. Download it at: + +https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2100.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2100.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6f85e1d06031 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2100.txt @@ -0,0 +1,293 @@ + +Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Driver for Linux in support of: + +Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Network Connection + +Copyright (C) 2003-2006, Intel Corporation + +README.ipw2100 + +Version: git-1.1.5 +Date : January 25, 2006 + +Index +----------------------------------------------- +0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER +1. Introduction +2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Features +3. Command Line Parameters +4. Sysfs Helper Files +5. Radio Kill Switch +6. Dynamic Firmware +7. Power Management +8. Support +9. License + + +0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER +----------------------------------------------- + +Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!! + +Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and +quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and +governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they +are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are +generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, +satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes +necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid +interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to +provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and +governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the +product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and +software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect +radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These +parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, +channel scanning, and human exposure. + +For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties +of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN +adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any +patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that +have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, +utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have +not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for +ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear +no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated +with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under +the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and +(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing +support to any third parties for such modified products. + +Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be +modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval +upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and +system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be +non-compliant. + +The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a +part of a development project. Conformance to local regulatory +requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer. As +such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of +solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please +obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at: + +http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/sb/CS-006408.htm + +1. Introduction +----------------------------------------------- + +This document provides a brief overview of the features supported by the +IPW2100 driver project. The main project website, where the latest +development version of the driver can be found, is: + + http://ipw2100.sourceforge.net + +There you can find the not only the latest releases, but also information about +potential fixes and patches, as well as links to the development mailing list +for the driver project. + + +2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Supported Features +----------------------------------------------- +- Managed (BSS) and Ad-Hoc (IBSS) +- WEP (shared key and open) +- Wireless Tools support +- 802.1x (tested with XSupplicant 1.0.1) + +Enabled (but not supported) features: +- Monitor/RFMon mode +- WPA/WPA2 + +The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection +on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been +performed on a given feature. + + +3. Command Line Parameters +----------------------------------------------- + +If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used +by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this +syntax: + + modprobe ipw2100 [<option>=<VAL1><,VAL2>...] + +For example, to disable the radio on driver loading, enter: + + modprobe ipw2100 disable=1 + +The ipw2100 driver supports the following module parameters: + +Name Value Example: +debug 0x0-0xffffffff debug=1024 +mode 0,1,2 mode=1 /* AdHoc */ +channel int channel=3 /* Only valid in AdHoc or Monitor */ +associate boolean associate=0 /* Do NOT auto associate */ +disable boolean disable=1 /* Do not power the HW */ + + +4. Sysfs Helper Files +--------------------------- +----------------------------------------------- + +There are several ways to control the behavior of the driver. Many of the +general capabilities are exposed through the Wireless Tools (iwconfig). There +are a few capabilities that are exposed through entries in the Linux Sysfs. + + +----- Driver Level ------ +For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/ + + debug_level + + This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter. For + information on the various debugging levels available, run the 'dvals' + script found in the driver source directory. + + NOTE: 'debug_level' is only enabled if CONFIG_IPW2100_DEBUG is turn + on. + +----- Device Level ------ +For the device level files look in + + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/{PCI-ID}/ + +For example: + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/0000:02:01.0 + +For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100: + + rf_kill + read - + 0 = RF kill not enabled (radio on) + 1 = SW based RF kill active (radio off) + 2 = HW based RF kill active (radio off) + 3 = Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off) + write - + 0 = If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on + 1 = If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill + + NOTE: If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW + based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on + + +5. Radio Kill Switch +----------------------------------------------- +Most laptops provide the ability for the user to physically disable the radio. +Some vendors have implemented this as a physical switch that requires no +software to turn the radio off and on. On other laptops, however, the switch +is controlled through a button being pressed and a software driver then making +calls to turn the radio off and on. This is referred to as a "software based +RF kill switch" + +See the Sysfs helper file 'rf_kill' for determining the state of the RF switch +on your system. + + +6. Dynamic Firmware +----------------------------------------------- +As the firmware is licensed under a restricted use license, it can not be +included within the kernel sources. To enable the IPW2100 you will need a +firmware image to load into the wireless NIC's processors. + +You can obtain these images from <http://ipw2100.sf.net/firmware.php>. + +See INSTALL for instructions on installing the firmware. + + +7. Power Management +----------------------------------------------- +The IPW2100 supports the configuration of the Power Save Protocol +through a private wireless extension interface. The IPW2100 supports +the following different modes: + + off No power management. Radio is always on. + on Automatic power management + 1-5 Different levels of power management. The higher the + number the greater the power savings, but with an impact to + packet latencies. + +Power management works by powering down the radio after a certain +interval of time has passed where no packets are passed through the +radio. Once powered down, the radio remains in that state for a given +period of time. For higher power savings, the interval between last +packet processed to sleep is shorter and the sleep period is longer. + +When the radio is asleep, the access point sending data to the station +must buffer packets at the AP until the station wakes up and requests +any buffered packets. If you have an AP that does not correctly support +the PSP protocol you may experience packet loss or very poor performance +while power management is enabled. If this is the case, you will need +to try and find a firmware update for your AP, or disable power +management (via `iwconfig eth1 power off`) + +To configure the power level on the IPW2100 you use a combination of +iwconfig and iwpriv. iwconfig is used to turn power management on, off, +and set it to auto. + + iwconfig eth1 power off Disables radio power down + iwconfig eth1 power on Enables radio power management to + last set level (defaults to AUTO) + iwpriv eth1 set_power 0 Sets power level to AUTO and enables + power management if not previously + enabled. + iwpriv eth1 set_power 1-5 Set the power level as specified, + enabling power management if not + previously enabled. + +You can view the current power level setting via: + + iwpriv eth1 get_power + +It will return the current period or timeout that is configured as a string +in the form of xxxx/yyyy (z) where xxxx is the timeout interval (amount of +time after packet processing), yyyy is the period to sleep (amount of time to +wait before powering the radio and querying the access point for buffered +packets), and z is the 'power level'. If power management is turned off the +xxxx/yyyy will be replaced with 'off' -- the level reported will be the active +level if `iwconfig eth1 power on` is invoked. + + +8. Support +----------------------------------------------- + +For general development information and support, +go to: + + http://ipw2100.sf.net/ + +The ipw2100 1.1.0 driver and firmware can be downloaded from: + + http://support.intel.com + +For installation support on the ipw2100 1.1.0 driver on Linux kernels +2.6.8 or greater, email support is available from: + + http://supportmail.intel.com + +9. License +----------------------------------------------- + + Copyright(c) 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it + under the terms of the GNU General Public License (version 2) as + published by the Free Software Foundation. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT + ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or + FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for + more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with + this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 + Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + + The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the + file called LICENSE. + + License Contact Information: + James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com> + Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2200.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2200.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b7658bed4906 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ipw2200.txt @@ -0,0 +1,472 @@ + +Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux in support of: + +Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection +Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection + +Note: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux and Intel(R) +PRO/Wireless 2200BG Driver for Linux is a unified driver that works on +both hardware adapters listed above. In this document the Intel(R) +PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux will be used to reference the +unified driver. + +Copyright (C) 2004-2006, Intel Corporation + +README.ipw2200 + +Version: 1.1.2 +Date : March 30, 2006 + + +Index +----------------------------------------------- +0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER +1. Introduction +1.1. Overview of features +1.2. Module parameters +1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods +1.4. Sysfs Helper Files +1.5. Supported channels +2. Ad-Hoc Networking +3. Interacting with Wireless Tools +3.1. iwconfig mode +3.2. iwconfig sens +4. About the Version Numbers +5. Firmware installation +6. Support +7. License + + +0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER +----------------------------------------------- + +Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!! + +Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and +quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and +governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they +are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are +generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, +satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes +necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid +interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to +provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and +governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the +product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and +software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect +radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These +parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, +channel scanning, and human exposure. + +For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties +of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN +adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any +patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that +have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, +utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have +not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for +ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear +no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated +with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under +the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and +(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing +support to any third parties for such modified products. + +Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be +modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval +upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and +system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be +non-compliant. + +The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a +part of a development project. Conformance to local regulatory +requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer. As +such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of +solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please +obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at: + +http://support.intel.com + + +1. Introduction +----------------------------------------------- +The following sections attempt to provide a brief introduction to using +the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux. + +This document is not meant to be a comprehensive manual on +understanding or using wireless technologies, but should be sufficient +to get you moving without wires on Linux. + +For information on building and installing the driver, see the INSTALL +file. + + +1.1. Overview of Features +----------------------------------------------- +The current release (1.1.2) supports the following features: + ++ BSS mode (Infrastructure, Managed) ++ IBSS mode (Ad-Hoc) ++ WEP (OPEN and SHARED KEY mode) ++ 802.1x EAP via wpa_supplicant and xsupplicant ++ Wireless Extension support ++ Full B and G rate support (2200 and 2915) ++ Full A rate support (2915 only) ++ Transmit power control ++ S state support (ACPI suspend/resume) + +The following features are currently enabled, but not officially +supported: + ++ WPA ++ long/short preamble support ++ Monitor mode (aka RFMon) + +The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection +on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been +performed on a given feature. + + + +1.2. Command Line Parameters +----------------------------------------------- + +Like many modules used in the Linux kernel, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless +2915ABG Driver for Linux allows configuration options to be provided +as module parameters. The most common way to specify a module parameter +is via the command line. + +The general form is: + +% modprobe ipw2200 parameter=value + +Where the supported parameter are: + + associate + Set to 0 to disable the auto scan-and-associate functionality of the + driver. If disabled, the driver will not attempt to scan + for and associate to a network until it has been configured with + one or more properties for the target network, for example configuring + the network SSID. Default is 0 (do not auto-associate) + + Example: % modprobe ipw2200 associate=0 + + auto_create + Set to 0 to disable the auto creation of an Ad-Hoc network + matching the channel and network name parameters provided. + Default is 1. + + channel + channel number for association. The normal method for setting + the channel would be to use the standard wireless tools + (i.e. `iwconfig eth1 channel 10`), but it is useful sometimes + to set this while debugging. Channel 0 means 'ANY' + + debug + If using a debug build, this is used to control the amount of debug + info is logged. See the 'dvals' and 'load' script for more info on + how to use this (the dvals and load scripts are provided as part + of the ipw2200 development snapshot releases available from the + SourceForge project at http://ipw2200.sf.net) + + led + Can be used to turn on experimental LED code. + 0 = Off, 1 = On. Default is 1. + + mode + Can be used to set the default mode of the adapter. + 0 = Managed, 1 = Ad-Hoc, 2 = Monitor + + +1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods +----------------------------------------------- + +As an interface designed to handle generic hardware, there are certain +capabilities not exposed through the normal Wireless Tool interface. As +such, a provision is provided for a driver to declare custom, or +private, methods. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux +defines several of these to configure various settings. + +The general form of using the private wireless methods is: + + % iwpriv $IFNAME method parameters + +Where $IFNAME is the interface name the device is registered with +(typically eth1, customized via one of the various network interface +name managers, such as ifrename) + +The supported private methods are: + + get_mode + Can be used to report out which IEEE mode the driver is + configured to support. Example: + + % iwpriv eth1 get_mode + eth1 get_mode:802.11bg (6) + + set_mode + Can be used to configure which IEEE mode the driver will + support. + + Usage: + % iwpriv eth1 set_mode {mode} + Where {mode} is a number in the range 1-7: + 1 802.11a (2915 only) + 2 802.11b + 3 802.11ab (2915 only) + 4 802.11g + 5 802.11ag (2915 only) + 6 802.11bg + 7 802.11abg (2915 only) + + get_preamble + Can be used to report configuration of preamble length. + + set_preamble + Can be used to set the configuration of preamble length: + + Usage: + % iwpriv eth1 set_preamble {mode} + Where {mode} is one of: + 1 Long preamble only + 0 Auto (long or short based on connection) + + +1.4. Sysfs Helper Files: +----------------------------------------------- + +The Linux kernel provides a pseudo file system that can be used to +access various components of the operating system. The Intel(R) +PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes several configuration +parameters through this mechanism. + +An entry in the sysfs can support reading and/or writing. You can +typically query the contents of a sysfs entry through the use of cat, +and can set the contents via echo. For example: + +% cat /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level + +Will report the current debug level of the driver's logging subsystem +(only available if CONFIG_IPW2200_DEBUG was configured when the driver +was built). + +You can set the debug level via: + +% echo $VALUE > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level + +Where $VALUE would be a number in the case of this sysfs entry. The +input to sysfs files does not have to be a number. For example, the +firmware loader used by hotplug utilizes sysfs entries for transferring +the firmware image from user space into the driver. + +The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes sysfs entries +at two levels -- driver level, which apply to all instances of the driver +(in the event that there are more than one device installed) and device +level, which applies only to the single specific instance. + + +1.4.1 Driver Level Sysfs Helper Files +----------------------------------------------- + +For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/ + + debug_level + + This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter + + + +1.4.2 Device Level Sysfs Helper Files +----------------------------------------------- + +For the device level files, look in + + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/{PCI-ID}/ + +For example: + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/0000:02:01.0 + +For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200: + + rf_kill + read - + 0 = RF kill not enabled (radio on) + 1 = SW based RF kill active (radio off) + 2 = HW based RF kill active (radio off) + 3 = Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off) + write - + 0 = If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on + 1 = If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill + + NOTE: If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW + based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on + + ucode + read-only access to the ucode version number + + led + read - + 0 = LED code disabled + 1 = LED code enabled + write - + 0 = Disable LED code + 1 = Enable LED code + + NOTE: The LED code has been reported to hang some systems when + running ifconfig and is therefore disabled by default. + + +1.5. Supported channels +----------------------------------------------- + +Upon loading the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux, a +message stating the detected geography code and the number of 802.11 +channels supported by the card will be displayed in the log. + +The geography code corresponds to a regulatory domain as shown in the +table below. + + Supported channels +Code Geography 802.11bg 802.11a + +--- Restricted 11 0 +ZZF Custom US/Canada 11 8 +ZZD Rest of World 13 0 +ZZA Custom USA & Europe & High 11 13 +ZZB Custom NA & Europe 11 13 +ZZC Custom Japan 11 4 +ZZM Custom 11 0 +ZZE Europe 13 19 +ZZJ Custom Japan 14 4 +ZZR Rest of World 14 0 +ZZH High Band 13 4 +ZZG Custom Europe 13 4 +ZZK Europe 13 24 +ZZL Europe 11 13 + + +2. Ad-Hoc Networking +----------------------------------------------- + +When using a device in an Ad-Hoc network, it is useful to understand the +sequence and requirements for the driver to be able to create, join, or +merge networks. + +The following attempts to provide enough information so that you can +have a consistent experience while using the driver as a member of an +Ad-Hoc network. + +2.1. Joining an Ad-Hoc Network +----------------------------------------------- + +The easiest way to get onto an Ad-Hoc network is to join one that +already exists. + +2.2. Creating an Ad-Hoc Network +----------------------------------------------- + +An Ad-Hoc networks is created using the syntax of the Wireless tool. + +For Example: +iwconfig eth1 mode ad-hoc essid testing channel 2 + +2.3. Merging Ad-Hoc Networks +----------------------------------------------- + + +3. Interaction with Wireless Tools +----------------------------------------------- + +3.1 iwconfig mode +----------------------------------------------- + +When configuring the mode of the adapter, all run-time configured parameters +are reset to the value used when the module was loaded. This includes +channels, rates, ESSID, etc. + +3.2 iwconfig sens +----------------------------------------------- + +The 'iwconfig ethX sens XX' command will not set the signal sensitivity +threshold, as described in iwconfig documentation, but rather the number +of consecutive missed beacons that will trigger handover, i.e. roaming +to another access point. At the same time, it will set the disassociation +threshold to 3 times the given value. + + +4. About the Version Numbers +----------------------------------------------- + +Due to the nature of open source development projects, there are +frequently changes being incorporated that have not gone through +a complete validation process. These changes are incorporated into +development snapshot releases. + +Releases are numbered with a three level scheme: + + major.minor.development + +Any version where the 'development' portion is 0 (for example +1.0.0, 1.1.0, etc.) indicates a stable version that will be made +available for kernel inclusion. + +Any version where the 'development' portion is not a 0 (for +example 1.0.1, 1.1.5, etc.) indicates a development version that is +being made available for testing and cutting edge users. The stability +and functionality of the development releases are not know. We make +efforts to try and keep all snapshots reasonably stable, but due to the +frequency of their release, and the desire to get those releases +available as quickly as possible, unknown anomalies should be expected. + +The major version number will be incremented when significant changes +are made to the driver. Currently, there are no major changes planned. + +5. Firmware installation +---------------------------------------------- + +The driver requires a firmware image, download it and extract the +files under /lib/firmware (or wherever your hotplug's firmware.agent +will look for firmware files) + +The firmware can be downloaded from the following URL: + + http://ipw2200.sf.net/ + + +6. Support +----------------------------------------------- + +For direct support of the 1.0.0 version, you can contact +http://supportmail.intel.com, or you can use the open source project +support. + +For general information and support, go to: + + http://ipw2200.sf.net/ + + +7. License +----------------------------------------------- + + Copyright(c) 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it + under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as + published by the Free Software Foundation. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT + ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or + FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for + more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with + this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 + Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + + The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the + file called LICENSE. + + Contact Information: + James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com> + Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8bd80e27843d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgb.rst @@ -0,0 +1,467 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection +===================================================================== + +October 1, 2018 + + +Contents +======== + +- In This Release +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Command Line Parameters +- Improving Performance +- Additional Configurations +- Known Issues/Troubleshooting +- Support + + + +In This Release +=============== + +This file describes the ixgb Linux Base Driver for the 10 Gigabit Intel(R) +Network Connection. This driver includes support for Itanium(R)2-based +systems. + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your 10 Gigabit adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply +to use with Linux. + +The following features are available in this kernel: + - Native VLANs + - Channel Bonding (teaming) + - SNMP + +Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source: +/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt + +The driver information previously displayed in the /proc filesystem is not +supported in this release. Alternatively, you can use ethtool (version 1.6 +or later), lspci, and iproute2 to obtain the same information. + +Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section "Additional +Configurations" later in this document. + + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +The following Intel network adapters are compatible with the drivers in this +release: + ++------------+------------------------------+----------------------------------+ +| Controller | Adapter Name | Physical Layer | ++============+==============================+==================================+ +| 82597EX | Intel(R) PRO/10GbE LR/SR/CX4 | - 10G Base-LR (fiber) | +| | Server Adapters | - 10G Base-SR (fiber) | +| | | - 10G Base-CX4 (copper) | ++------------+------------------------------+----------------------------------+ + +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: + + https://support.intel.com + + +Command Line Parameters +======================= + +If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are +used by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using +this syntax:: + + modprobe ixgb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] + +For example, with two 10GbE PCI adapters, entering:: + + modprobe ixgb TxDescriptors=80,128 + +loads the ixgb driver with 80 TX resources for the first adapter and 128 TX +resources for the second adapter. + +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. + +Copybreak +--------- +:Valid Range: 0-XXXX +:Default Value: 256 + + This is the maximum size of packet that is copied to a new buffer on + receive. + +Debug +----- +:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all) +:Default Value: 0 + + This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the + system logs. + +FlowControl +----------- +:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx) +:Default Value: 1 if no EEPROM, otherwise read from EEPROM + + This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) to + Ethernet PAUSE frames. There are hardware bugs associated with enabling + Tx flow control so beware. + +RxDescriptors +------------- +:Valid Range: 64-4096 +:Default Value: 1024 + + This value is the number of receive descriptors allocated by the driver. + Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more incoming packets. + Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for + each descriptor and can be either 2048, 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes, + depending on the MTU setting. When the MTU size is 1500 or less, the + receive buffer size is 2048 bytes. When the MTU is greater than 1500 the + receive buffer size will be either 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes. The + maximum MTU size is 16114. + +TxDescriptors +------------- +:Valid Range: 64-4096 +:Default Value: 256 + + This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver. + Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each + descriptor is 16 bytes. + +RxIntDelay +---------- +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 72 + + This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of + 0.8192 microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU + efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing + this value adds extra latency to frame reception and can end up + decreasing the throughput of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting + dropped receives, this value may be set too high, causing the driver to + run out of available receive descriptors. + +TxIntDelay +---------- +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 32 + + This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of + 0.8192 microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU + efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing + this value adds extra latency to frame transmission and can end up + decreasing the throughput of TCP traffic. If this value is set too high, + it will cause the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors. + +XsumRX +------ +:Valid Range: 0-1 +:Default Value: 1 + + A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum + offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware. + +RxFCHighThresh +-------------- +:Valid Range: 1,536-262,136 (0x600 - 0x3FFF8, 8 byte granularity) +:Default Value: 196,608 (0x30000) + + Receive Flow control high threshold (when we send a pause frame) + +RxFCLowThresh +------------- +:Valid Range: 64-262,136 (0x40 - 0x3FFF8, 8 byte granularity) +:Default Value: 163,840 (0x28000) + + Receive Flow control low threshold (when we send a resume frame) + +FCReqTimeout +------------ +:Valid Range: 1-65535 +:Default Value: 65535 + + Flow control request timeout (how long to pause the link partner's tx) + +IntDelayEnable +-------------- +:Value Range: 0,1 +:Default Value: 1 + + Interrupt Delay, 0 disables transmit interrupt delay and 1 enables it. + + +Improving Performance +===================== + +With the 10 Gigabit server adapters, the default Linux configuration will +very likely limit the total available throughput artificially. There is a set +of configuration changes that, when applied together, will increase the ability +of Linux to transmit and receive data. The following enhancements were +originally acquired from settings published at http://www.spec.org/web99/ for +various submitted results using Linux. + +NOTE: + These changes are only suggestions, and serve as a starting point for + tuning your network performance. + +The changes are made in three major ways, listed in order of greatest effect: + +- Use ip link to modify the mtu (maximum transmission unit) and the txqueuelen + parameter. +- Use sysctl to modify /proc parameters (essentially kernel tuning) +- Use setpci to modify the MMRBC field in PCI-X configuration space to increase + transmit burst lengths on the bus. + +NOTE: + setpci modifies the adapter's configuration registers to allow it to read + up to 4k bytes at a time (for transmits). However, for some systems the + behavior after modifying this register may be undefined (possibly errors of + some kind). A power-cycle, hard reset or explicitly setting the e6 register + back to 22 (setpci -d 8086:1a48 e6.b=22) may be required to get back to a + stable configuration. + +- COPY these lines and paste them into ixgb_perf.sh: + +:: + + #!/bin/bash + echo "configuring network performance , edit this file to change the interface + or device ID of 10GbE card" + # set mmrbc to 4k reads, modify only Intel 10GbE device IDs + # replace 1a48 with appropriate 10GbE device's ID installed on the system, + # if needed. + setpci -d 8086:1a48 e6.b=2e + # set the MTU (max transmission unit) - it requires your switch and clients + # to change as well. + # set the txqueuelen + # your ixgb adapter should be loaded as eth1 for this to work, change if needed + ip li set dev eth1 mtu 9000 txqueuelen 1000 up + # call the sysctl utility to modify /proc/sys entries + sysctl -p ./sysctl_ixgb.conf + +- COPY these lines and paste them into sysctl_ixgb.conf: + +:: + + # some of the defaults may be different for your kernel + # call this file with sysctl -p <this file> + # these are just suggested values that worked well to increase throughput in + # several network benchmark tests, your mileage may vary + + ### IPV4 specific settings + # turn TCP timestamp support off, default 1, reduces CPU use + net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps = 0 + # turn SACK support off, default on + # on systems with a VERY fast bus -> memory interface this is the big gainer + net.ipv4.tcp_sack = 0 + # set min/default/max TCP read buffer, default 4096 87380 174760 + net.ipv4.tcp_rmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 + # set min/pressure/max TCP write buffer, default 4096 16384 131072 + net.ipv4.tcp_wmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 + # set min/pressure/max TCP buffer space, default 31744 32256 32768 + net.ipv4.tcp_mem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 + + ### CORE settings (mostly for socket and UDP effect) + # set maximum receive socket buffer size, default 131071 + net.core.rmem_max = 524287 + # set maximum send socket buffer size, default 131071 + net.core.wmem_max = 524287 + # set default receive socket buffer size, default 65535 + net.core.rmem_default = 524287 + # set default send socket buffer size, default 65535 + net.core.wmem_default = 524287 + # set maximum amount of option memory buffers, default 10240 + net.core.optmem_max = 524287 + # set number of unprocessed input packets before kernel starts dropping them; default 300 + net.core.netdev_max_backlog = 300000 + +Edit the ixgb_perf.sh script if necessary to change eth1 to whatever interface +your ixgb driver is using and/or replace '1a48' with appropriate 10GbE device's +ID installed on the system. + +NOTE: + Unless these scripts are added to the boot process, these changes will + only last only until the next system reboot. + + +Resolving Slow UDP Traffic +-------------------------- +If your server does not seem to be able to receive UDP traffic as fast as it +can receive TCP traffic, it could be because Linux, by default, does not set +the network stack buffers as large as they need to be to support high UDP +transfer rates. One way to alleviate this problem is to allow more memory to +be used by the IP stack to store incoming data. + +For instance, use the commands:: + + sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=262143 + +and:: + + sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=262143 + +to increase the read buffer memory max and default to 262143 (256k - 1) from +defaults of max=131071 (128k - 1) and default=65535 (64k - 1). These variables +will increase the amount of memory used by the network stack for receives, and +can be increased significantly more if necessary for your application. + + +Additional Configurations +========================= + +Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions +------------------------------------------------- +Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is +distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding +an alias line to /etc/modprobe.conf as well as editing other system startup +scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux distributions ship +with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the proper way to +configure a network device for your system, refer to your distribution +documentation. If during this process you are asked for the driver or module +name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for the Intel 10GbE Family of +Adapters is ixgb. + +Viewing Link Messages +--------------------- +Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is +restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on +your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following:: + + dmesg -n 8 + +NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. + +Jumbo Frames +------------ +The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is +enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than the default of 1500. +The maximum value for the MTU is 16114. Use the ip command to +increase the MTU size. For example:: + + ip li set dev ethx mtu 9000 + +The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16114. This value coincides +with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128. + +Ethtool +------- +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool +version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. + +The latest release of ethtool can be found from +https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + +NOTE: + The ethtool version 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. + Support for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by + upgrading to the latest version. + +NAPI +---- +NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the ixgb driver. + +See https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi for more information on +NAPI. + + +Known Issues/Troubleshooting +============================ + +NOTE: + After installing the driver, if your Intel Network Connection is not + working, verify in the "In This Release" section of the readme that you have + installed the correct driver. + +Cable Interoperability Issue with Fujitsu XENPAK Module in SmartBits Chassis +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Excessive CRC errors may be observed if the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4 +Server adapter is connected to a Fujitsu XENPAK CX4 module in a SmartBits +chassis using 15 m/24AWG cable assemblies manufactured by Fujitsu or Leoni. +The CRC errors may be received either by the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4 +Server adapter or the SmartBits. If this situation occurs using a different +cable assembly may resolve the issue. + +Cable Interoperability Issues with HP Procurve 3400cl Switch Port +----------------------------------------------------------------- +Excessive CRC errors may be observed if the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4 Server +adapter is connected to an HP Procurve 3400cl switch port using short cables +(1 m or shorter). If this situation occurs, using a longer cable may resolve +the issue. + +Excessive CRC errors may be observed using Fujitsu 24AWG cable assemblies that +Are 10 m or longer or where using a Leoni 15 m/24AWG cable assembly. The CRC +errors may be received either by the CX4 Server adapter or at the switch. If +this situation occurs, using a different cable assembly may resolve the issue. + +Jumbo Frames System Requirement +------------------------------- +Memory allocation failures have been observed on Linux systems with 64 MB +of RAM or less that are running Jumbo Frames. If you are using Jumbo +Frames, your system may require more than the advertised minimum +requirement of 64 MB of system memory. + +Performance Degradation with Jumbo Frames +----------------------------------------- +Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames +environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer +size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help. +See the specific application manual and /usr/src/linux*/Documentation/ +networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details. + +Allocating Rx Buffers when Using Jumbo Frames +--------------------------------------------- +Allocating Rx buffers when using Jumbo Frames on 2.6.x kernels may fail if +the available memory is heavily fragmented. This issue may be seen with PCI-X +adapters or with packet split disabled. This can be reduced or eliminated +by changing the amount of available memory for receive buffer allocation, by +increasing /proc/sys/vm/min_free_kbytes. + +Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network +------------------------------------------------------ +Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have +one system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain +(non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces +will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system. +This results in unbalanced receive traffic. + +If you have multiple interfaces in a server, do either of the following: + + - Turn on ARP filtering by entering:: + + echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter + + - Install the interfaces in separate broadcast domains - either in + different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs. + +UDP Stress Test Dropped Packet Issue +-------------------------------------- +Under small packets UDP stress test with 10GbE driver, the Linux system +may drop UDP packets due to the fullness of socket buffers. You may want +to change the driver's Flow Control variables to the minimum value for +controlling packet reception. + +Tx Hangs Possible Under Stress +------------------------------ +Under stress conditions, if TX hangs occur, turning off TSO +"ethtool -K eth0 tso off" may resolve the problem. + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..86d887a63606 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbe.rst @@ -0,0 +1,540 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet 10 Gigabit PCI Express Adapters +============================================================================= + +Intel 10 Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Command Line Parameters +- Additional Configurations +- Known Issues +- Support + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +The driver is compatible with devices based on the following: + + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82598 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82599 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X520 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X540 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller x550 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X552 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X553 + +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel +network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +https://www.intel.com/support + +SFP+ Devices with Pluggable Optics +---------------------------------- + +82599-BASED ADAPTERS +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +NOTES: +- If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics or is an +Intel(R) Ethernet Server Adapter X520-2, then it only supports Intel optics +and/or the direct attach cables listed below. +- When 82599-based SFP+ devices are connected back to back, they should be set +to the same Speed setting via ethtool. Results may vary if you mix speed +settings. + ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers | ++===============+=======================================+==================+ +| SR Modules | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) | FTLX8571D3BCV-IT | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) | AFBR-703SDZ-IN2 | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) | AFBR-703SDDZ-IN1 | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| LR Modules | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) | FTLX1471D3BCV-IT | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) | AFCT-701SDZ-IN2 | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) | AFCT-701SDDZ-IN1 | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ + +The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules that have received some +testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices. + ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers | ++===============+=======================================+==================+ +| Finisar | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX8571D3BCL | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Avago | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | AFBR-700SDZ | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Finisar | SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX1471D3BCL | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Finisar | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) | FTLX8571D3QCV-IT | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Avago | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) | AFBR-703SDZ-IN1 | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Finisar | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) | FTLX1471D3QCV-IT | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Avago | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) | AFCT-701SDZ-IN1 | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Finisar | 1000BASE-T SFP | FCLF8522P2BTL | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Avago | 1000BASE-T | ABCU-5710RZ | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| HP | 1000BASE-SX SFP | 453153-001 | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ + +82599-based adapters support all passive and active limiting direct attach +cables that comply with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. + +Laser turns off for SFP+ when ifconfig ethX down +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +"ifconfig ethX down" turns off the laser for 82599-based SFP+ fiber adapters. +"ifconfig ethX up" turns on the laser. +Alternatively, you can use "ip link set [down/up] dev ethX" to turn the +laser off and on. + + +82599-based QSFP+ Adapters +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +NOTES: +- If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics, it only +supports Intel optics. +- 82599-based QSFP+ adapters only support 4x10 Gbps connections. 1x40 Gbps +connections are not supported. QSFP+ link partners must be configured for +4x10 Gbps. +- 82599-based QSFP+ adapters do not support automatic link speed detection. +The link speed must be configured to either 10 Gbps or 1 Gbps to match the link +partners speed capabilities. Incorrect speed configurations will result in +failure to link. +- Intel(R) Ethernet Converged Network Adapter X520-Q1 only supports the optics +and direct attach cables listed below. + ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers | ++===============+=======================================+==================+ +| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G QSFP+ SRL (bailed) | E10GQSFPSR | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ + +82599-based QSFP+ adapters support all passive and active limiting QSFP+ +direct attach cables that comply with SFF-8436 v4.1 specifications. + +82598-BASED ADAPTERS +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +NOTES: +- Intel(r) Ethernet Network Adapters that support removable optical modules +only support their original module type (for example, the Intel(R) 10 Gigabit +SR Dual Port Express Module only supports SR optical modules). If you plug in +a different type of module, the driver will not load. +- Hot Swapping/hot plugging optical modules is not supported. +- Only single speed, 10 gigabit modules are supported. +- LAN on Motherboard (LOMs) may support DA, SR, or LR modules. Other module +types are not supported. Please see your system documentation for details. + +The following is a list of SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that have +received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices. + ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers | ++===============+=======================================+==================+ +| Finisar | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX8571D3BCL | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Avago | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | AFBR-700SDZ | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ +| Finisar | SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX1471D3BCL | ++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+ + +82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply with +SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach cables +are not supported. + +Third party optic modules and cables referred to above are listed only for the +purpose of highlighting third party specifications and potential +compatibility, and are not recommendations or endorsements or sponsorship of +any third party's product by Intel. Intel is not endorsing or promoting +products made by any third party and the third party reference is provided +only to share information regarding certain optic modules and cables with the +above specifications. There may be other manufacturers or suppliers, producing +or supplying optic modules and cables with similar or matching descriptions. +Customers must use their own discretion and diligence to purchase optic +modules and cables from any third party of their choice. Customers are solely +responsible for assessing the suitability of the product and/or devices and +for the selection of the vendor for purchasing any product. THE OPTIC MODULES +AND CABLES REFERRED TO ABOVE ARE NOT WARRANTED OR SUPPORTED BY INTEL. INTEL +ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED +WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF SUCH THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS OR +SELECTION OF VENDOR BY CUSTOMERS. + +Command Line Parameters +======================= + +max_vfs +------- +:Valid Range: 1-63 + +This parameter adds support for SR-IOV. It causes the driver to spawn up to +max_vfs worth of virtual functions. +If the value is greater than 0 it will also force the VMDq parameter to be 1 or +more. + +NOTE: This parameter is only used on kernel 3.7.x and below. On kernel 3.8.x +and above, use sysfs to enable VFs. Also, for Red Hat distributions, this +parameter is only used on version 6.6 and older. For version 6.7 and newer, use +sysfs. For example:: + + #echo $num_vf_enabled > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs // enable VFs + #echo 0 > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs //disable VFs + +The parameters for the driver are referenced by position. Thus, if you have a +dual port adapter, or more than one adapter in your system, and want N virtual +functions per port, you must specify a number for each port with each parameter +separated by a comma. For example:: + + modprobe ixgbe max_vfs=4 + +This will spawn 4 VFs on the first port. + +:: + + modprobe ixgbe max_vfs=2,4 + +This will spawn 2 VFs on the first port and 4 VFs on the second port. + +NOTE: Caution must be used in loading the driver with these parameters. +Depending on your system configuration, number of slots, etc., it is impossible +to predict in all cases where the positions would be on the command line. + +NOTE: Neither the device nor the driver control how VFs are mapped into config +space. Bus layout will vary by operating system. On operating systems that +support it, you can check sysfs to find the mapping. + +NOTE: When either SR-IOV mode or VMDq mode is enabled, hardware VLAN filtering +and VLAN tag stripping/insertion will remain enabled. Please remove the old +VLAN filter before the new VLAN filter is added. For example, + +:: + + ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 100 // set VLAN 100 for VF 0 + ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 0 // Delete VLAN 100 + ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 200 // set a new VLAN 200 for VF 0 + +With kernel 3.6, the driver supports the simultaneous usage of max_vfs and DCB +features, subject to the constraints described below. Prior to kernel 3.6, the +driver did not support the simultaneous operation of max_vfs greater than 0 and +the DCB features (multiple traffic classes utilizing Priority Flow Control and +Extended Transmission Selection). + +When DCB is enabled, network traffic is transmitted and received through +multiple traffic classes (packet buffers in the NIC). The traffic is associated +with a specific class based on priority, which has a value of 0 through 7 used +in the VLAN tag. When SR-IOV is not enabled, each traffic class is associated +with a set of receive/transmit descriptor queue pairs. The number of queue +pairs for a given traffic class depends on the hardware configuration. When +SR-IOV is enabled, the descriptor queue pairs are grouped into pools. The +Physical Function (PF) and each Virtual Function (VF) is allocated a pool of +receive/transmit descriptor queue pairs. When multiple traffic classes are +configured (for example, DCB is enabled), each pool contains a queue pair from +each traffic class. When a single traffic class is configured in the hardware, +the pools contain multiple queue pairs from the single traffic class. + +The number of VFs that can be allocated depends on the number of traffic +classes that can be enabled. The configurable number of traffic classes for +each enabled VF is as follows: +0 - 15 VFs = Up to 8 traffic classes, depending on device support +16 - 31 VFs = Up to 4 traffic classes +32 - 63 VFs = 1 traffic class + +When VFs are configured, the PF is allocated one pool as well. The PF supports +the DCB features with the constraint that each traffic class will only use a +single queue pair. When zero VFs are configured, the PF can support multiple +queue pairs per traffic class. + +allow_unsupported_sfp +--------------------- +:Valid Range: 0,1 +:Default Value: 0 (disabled) + +This parameter allows unsupported and untested SFP+ modules on 82599-based +adapters, as long as the type of module is known to the driver. + +debug +----- +:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all) +:Default Value: 0 + +This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the system +logs. + + +Additional Features and Configurations +====================================== + +Flow Control +------------ +Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable +receiving and transmitting pause frames for ixgbe. When transmit is enabled, +pause frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined +threshold. When receive is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time +delay specified when a pause frame is received. + +NOTE: You must have a flow control capable link partner. + +Flow Control is enabled by default. + +Use ethtool to change the flow control settings. To enable or disable Rx or +Tx Flow Control:: + + ethtool -A eth? rx <on|off> tx <on|off> + +Note: This command only enables or disables Flow Control if auto-negotiation is +disabled. If auto-negotiation is enabled, this command changes the parameters +used for auto-negotiation with the link partner. + +To enable or disable auto-negotiation:: + + ethtool -s eth? autoneg <on|off> + +Note: Flow Control auto-negotiation is part of link auto-negotiation. Depending +on your device, you may not be able to change the auto-negotiation setting. + +NOTE: For 82598 backplane cards entering 1 gigabit mode, flow control default +behavior is changed to off. Flow control in 1 gigabit mode on these devices can +lead to transmit hangs. + +Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director +------------------------------- +The Intel Ethernet Flow Director performs the following tasks: + +- Directs receive packets according to their flows to different queues. +- Enables tight control on routing a flow in the platform. +- Matches flows and CPU cores for flow affinity. +- Supports multiple parameters for flexible flow classification and load + balancing (in SFP mode only). + +NOTE: Intel Ethernet Flow Director masking works in the opposite manner from +subnet masking. In the following command:: + + #ethtool -N eth11 flow-type ip4 src-ip 172.4.1.2 m 255.0.0.0 dst-ip \ + 172.21.1.1 m 255.128.0.0 action 31 + +The src-ip value that is written to the filter will be 0.4.1.2, not 172.0.0.0 +as might be expected. Similarly, the dst-ip value written to the filter will be +0.21.1.1, not 172.0.0.0. + +To enable or disable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director:: + + # ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off> + +When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programmed filters are flushed from +the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must be re-added when ntuple +is re-enabled. + +To add a filter that directs packet to queue 2, use -U or -N switch:: + + # ethtool -N ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \ + 192.168.10.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 2 [loc 1] + +To see the list of filters currently present:: + + # ethtool <-u|-n> ethX + +Sideband Perfect Filters +------------------------ +Sideband Perfect Filters are used to direct traffic that matches specified +characteristics. They are enabled through ethtool's ntuple interface. To add a +new filter use the following command:: + + ethtool -U <device> flow-type <type> src-ip <ip> dst-ip <ip> src-port <port> \ + dst-port <port> action <queue> + +Where: + <device> - the ethernet device to program + <type> - can be ip4, tcp4, udp4, or sctp4 + <ip> - the IP address to match on + <port> - the port number to match on + <queue> - the queue to direct traffic towards (-1 discards the matched traffic) + +Use the following command to delete a filter:: + + ethtool -U <device> delete <N> + +Where <N> is the filter id displayed when printing all the active filters, and +may also have been specified using "loc <N>" when adding the filter. + +The following example matches TCP traffic sent from 192.168.0.1, port 5300, +directed to 192.168.0.5, port 80, and sends it to queue 7:: + + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 \ + src-port 5300 dst-port 80 action 7 + +For each flow-type, the programmed filters must all have the same matching +input set. For example, issuing the following two commands is acceptable:: + + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7 + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10 + +Issuing the next two commands, however, is not acceptable, since the first +specifies src-ip and the second specifies dst-ip:: + + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7 + ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10 + +The second command will fail with an error. You may program multiple filters +with the same fields, using different values, but, on one device, you may not +program two TCP4 filters with different matching fields. + +Matching on a sub-portion of a field is not supported by the ixgbe driver, thus +partial mask fields are not supported. + +To create filters that direct traffic to a specific Virtual Function, use the +"user-def" parameter. Specify the user-def as a 64 bit value, where the lower 32 +bits represents the queue number, while the next 8 bits represent which VF. +Note that 0 is the PF, so the VF identifier is offset by 1. For example:: + + ... user-def 0x800000002 ... + +specifies to direct traffic to Virtual Function 7 (8 minus 1) into queue 2 of +that VF. + +Note that these filters will not break internal routing rules, and will not +route traffic that otherwise would not have been sent to the specified Virtual +Function. + +Jumbo Frames +------------ +Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) +to a value larger than the default value of 1500. + +Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the +following where <x> is the interface number:: + + ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up + +Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows:: + + ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x> + ip link set up dev eth<x> + +This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made +permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file:: + + /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x> // for RHEL + /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file> // for SLES + +NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9710. This value coincides +with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9728 bytes. + +NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive +each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when +allocating receive packets. + +NOTE: For 82599-based network connections, if you are enabling jumbo frames in +a virtual function (VF), jumbo frames must first be enabled in the physical +function (PF). The VF MTU setting cannot be larger than the PF MTU. + +Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO +-------------------------------- +The driver supports the in-kernel software implementation of GRO. GRO has +shown that by coalescing Rx traffic into larger chunks of data, CPU +utilization can be significantly reduced when under large Rx load. GRO is an +evolution of the previously-used LRO interface. GRO is able to coalesce +other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that +are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI. + +Data Center Bridging (DCB) +-------------------------- +NOTE: +The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow +Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is +enabled when setting up DCB on your switch. + +DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses +the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8 +different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. It also enables +priority flow control (802.1Qbb) which can limit or eliminate the number of +dropped packets during network stress. Bandwidth can be allocated to each of +these priorities, which is enforced at the hardware level (802.1Qaz). + +Adapter firmware implements LLDP and DCBX protocol agents as per 802.1AB and +802.1Qaz respectively. The firmware based DCBX agent runs in willing mode only +and can accept settings from a DCBX capable peer. Software configuration of +DCBX parameters via dcbtool/lldptool are not supported. + +The ixgbe driver implements the DCB netlink interface layer to allow user-space +to communicate with the driver and query DCB configuration for the port. + +ethtool +------- +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool +version is required for this functionality. Download it at: +https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + +FCoE +---- +The ixgbe driver supports Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and Data Center +Bridging (DCB). This code has no default effect on the regular driver +operation. Configuring DCB and FCoE is outside the scope of this README. Refer +to http://www.open-fcoe.org/ for FCoE project information and contact +ixgbe-eedc@lists.sourceforge.net for DCB information. + +MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature +---------------------------------- +When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by the +hardware and not transmitted. + +An interrupt is sent to the PF driver notifying it of the spoof attempt. When a +spoofed packet is detected, the PF driver will send the following message to +the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command):: + + ixgbe ethX: ixgbe_spoof_check: n spoofed packets detected + +where "x" is the PF interface number; and "n" is number of spoofed packets. +NOTE: This feature can be disabled for a specific Virtual Function (VF):: + + ip link set <pf dev> vf <vf id> spoofchk {off|on} + +IPsec Offload +------------- +The ixgbe driver supports IPsec Hardware Offload. When creating Security +Associations with "ip xfrm ..." the 'offload' tag option can be used to +register the IPsec SA with the driver in order to get higher throughput in +the secure communications. + +The offload is also supported for ixgbe's VFs, but the VF must be set as +'trusted' and the support must be enabled with:: + + ethtool --set-priv-flags eth<x> vf-ipsec on + ip link set eth<x> vf <y> trust on + + +Known Issues/Troubleshooting +============================ + +Enabling SR-IOV in a 64-bit Microsoft* Windows Server* 2012/R2 guest OS +----------------------------------------------------------------------- +Linux KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM. +This includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices based +on the Intel Ethernet Controller XL710. + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..56cde6366c2f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/intel/ixgbevf.rst @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +Linux* Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 10G Ethernet +============================================================= + +Intel 10 Gigabit Virtual Function Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Known Issues +- Support + +This driver supports 82599, X540, X550, and X552-based virtual function devices +that can only be activated on kernels that support SR-IOV. + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use +with Linux. + + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +The driver is compatible with devices based on the following: + + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82598 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82599 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X520 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X540 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller x550 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X552 + * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X553 + +For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel +network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website: +https://www.intel.com/support + +Known Issues/Troubleshooting +============================ + +SR-IOV requires the correct platform and OS support. + +The guest OS loading this driver must support MSI-X interrupts. + +This driver is only supported as a loadable module at this time. Intel is not +supplying patches against the kernel source to allow for static linking of the +drivers. + +VLANs: There is a limit of a total of 64 shared VLANs to 1 or more VFs. + + +Support +======= +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + +https://www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + +https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue +to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3bfa635bbbd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +Hyper-V network driver +====================== + +Compatibility +============= + +This driver is compatible with Windows Server 2012 R2, 2016 and +Windows 10. + +Features +======== + + Checksum offload + ---------------- + The netvsc driver supports checksum offload as long as the + Hyper-V host version does. Windows Server 2016 and Azure + support checksum offload for TCP and UDP for both IPv4 and + IPv6. Windows Server 2012 only supports checksum offload for TCP. + + Receive Side Scaling + -------------------- + Hyper-V supports receive side scaling. For TCP & UDP, packets can + be distributed among available queues based on IP address and port + number. + + For TCP & UDP, we can switch hash level between L3 and L4 by ethtool + command. TCP/UDP over IPv4 and v6 can be set differently. The default + hash level is L4. We currently only allow switching TX hash level + from within the guests. + + On Azure, fragmented UDP packets have high loss rate with L4 + hashing. Using L3 hashing is recommended in this case. + + For example, for UDP over IPv4 on eth0: + To include UDP port numbers in hashing: + ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sdfn + To exclude UDP port numbers in hashing: + ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sd + To show UDP hash level: + ethtool -n eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 + + Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO + -------------------------------- + The driver supports GRO and it is enabled by default. GRO coalesces + like packets and significantly reduces CPU usage under heavy Rx + load. + + Large Receive Offload (LRO), or Receive Side Coalescing (RSC) + ------------------------------------------------------------- + The driver supports LRO/RSC in the vSwitch feature. It reduces the per packet + processing overhead by coalescing multiple TCP segments when possible. The + feature is enabled by default on VMs running on Windows Server 2019 and + later. It may be changed by ethtool command: + ethtool -K eth0 lro on + ethtool -K eth0 lro off + + SR-IOV support + -------------- + Hyper-V supports SR-IOV as a hardware acceleration option. If SR-IOV + is enabled in both the vSwitch and the guest configuration, then the + Virtual Function (VF) device is passed to the guest as a PCI + device. In this case, both a synthetic (netvsc) and VF device are + visible in the guest OS and both NIC's have the same MAC address. + + The VF is enslaved by netvsc device. The netvsc driver will transparently + switch the data path to the VF when it is available and up. + Network state (addresses, firewall, etc) should be applied only to the + netvsc device; the slave device should not be accessed directly in + most cases. The exceptions are if some special queue discipline or + flow direction is desired, these should be applied directly to the + VF slave device. + + Receive Buffer + -------------- + Packets are received into a receive area which is created when device + is probed. The receive area is broken into MTU sized chunks and each may + contain one or more packets. The number of receive sections may be changed + via ethtool Rx ring parameters. + + There is a similar send buffer which is used to aggregate packets for sending. + The send area is broken into chunks of 6144 bytes, each of section may + contain one or more packets. The send buffer is an optimization, the driver + will use slower method to handle very large packets or if the send buffer + area is exhausted. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/s2io.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/s2io.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0362a42f7cf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/s2io.txt @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ +Release notes for Neterion's (Formerly S2io) Xframe I/II PCI-X 10GbE driver. + +Contents +======= +- 1. Introduction +- 2. Identifying the adapter/interface +- 3. Features supported +- 4. Command line parameters +- 5. Performance suggestions +- 6. Available Downloads + + +1. Introduction: +This Linux driver supports Neterion's Xframe I PCI-X 1.0 and +Xframe II PCI-X 2.0 adapters. It supports several features +such as jumbo frames, MSI/MSI-X, checksum offloads, TSO, UFO and so on. +See below for complete list of features. +All features are supported for both IPv4 and IPv6. + +2. Identifying the adapter/interface: +a. Insert the adapter(s) in your system. +b. Build and load driver +# insmod s2io.ko +c. View log messages +# dmesg | tail -40 +You will see messages similar to: +eth3: Neterion Xframe I 10GbE adapter (rev 3), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA +eth4: Neterion Xframe II 10GbE adapter (rev 2), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA +eth4: Device is on 64 bit 133MHz PCIX(M1) bus + +The above messages identify the adapter type(Xframe I/II), adapter revision, +driver version, interface name(eth3, eth4), Interrupt type(INTA, MSI, MSI-X). +In case of Xframe II, the PCI/PCI-X bus width and frequency are displayed +as well. + +To associate an interface with a physical adapter use "ethtool -p <ethX>". +The corresponding adapter's LED will blink multiple times. + +3. Features supported: +a. Jumbo frames. Xframe I/II supports MTU up to 9600 bytes, +modifiable using ip command. + +b. Offloads. Supports checksum offload(TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit +and receive, TSO. + +c. Multi-buffer receive mode. Scattering of packet across multiple +buffers. Currently driver supports 2-buffer mode which yields +significant performance improvement on certain platforms(SGI Altix, +IBM xSeries). + +d. MSI/MSI-X. Can be enabled on platforms which support this feature +(IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(up to 7% +on certain platforms). + +e. Statistics. Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed +using "ethtool -S" option. + +f. Multi-FIFO/Ring. Supports up to 8 transmit queues and receive rings, +with multiple steering options. + +4. Command line parameters +a. tx_fifo_num +Number of transmit queues +Valid range: 1-8 +Default: 1 + +b. rx_ring_num +Number of receive rings +Valid range: 1-8 +Default: 1 + +c. tx_fifo_len +Size of each transmit queue +Valid range: Total length of all queues should not exceed 8192 +Default: 4096 + +d. rx_ring_sz +Size of each receive ring(in 4K blocks) +Valid range: Limited by memory on system +Default: 30 + +e. intr_type +Specifies interrupt type. Possible values 0(INTA), 2(MSI-X) +Valid values: 0, 2 +Default: 2 + +5. Performance suggestions +General: +a. Set MTU to maximum(9000 for switch setup, 9600 in back-to-back configuration) +b. Set TCP windows size to optimal value. +For instance, for MTU=1500 a value of 210K has been observed to result in +good performance. +# sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="210000 210000 210000" +# sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="210000 210000 210000" +For MTU=9000, TCP window size of 10 MB is recommended. +# sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" +# sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000" + +Transmit performance: +a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters. +However, you may want to experiment with PCI bus parameters +max-split-transactions(MOST) and MMRBC (use setpci command). +A MOST value of 2 has been found optimal for Opterons and 3 for Itanium. +It could be different for your hardware. +Set MMRBC to 4K**. + +For example you can set +For opteron +#setpci -d 17d5:* 62=1d +For Itanium +#setpci -d 17d5:* 62=3d + +For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide. + +b. Ensure Transmit Checksum offload is enabled. Use ethtool to set/verify this +parameter. +c. Turn on TSO(using "ethtool -K") +# ethtool -K <ethX> tso on + +Receive performance: +a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters. +However, you may want to set PCI latency timer to 248. +#setpci -d 17d5:* LATENCY_TIMER=f8 +For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide. +b. Use 2-buffer mode. This results in large performance boost on +certain platforms(eg. SGI Altix, IBM xSeries). +c. Ensure Receive Checksum offload is enabled. Use "ethtool -K ethX" command to +set/verify this option. +d. Enable NAPI feature(in kernel configuration Device Drivers ---> Network +device support ---> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) ---> S2IO 10Gbe Xframe NIC) to +bring down CPU utilization. + +** For AMD opteron platforms with 8131 chipset, MMRBC=1 and MOST=1 are +recommended as safe parameters. +For more information, please review the AMD8131 errata at +http://vip.amd.com/us-en/assets/content_type/white_papers_and_tech_docs/ +26310_AMD-8131_HyperTransport_PCI-X_Tunnel_Revision_Guide_rev_3_18.pdf + +6. Support +For further support please contact either your 10GbE Xframe NIC vendor (IBM, +HP, SGI etc.) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/vxge.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/vxge.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..abfec245f97c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/neterion/vxge.txt @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +Neterion's (Formerly S2io) X3100 Series 10GbE PCIe Server Adapter Linux driver +============================================================================== + +Contents +-------- + +1) Introduction +2) Features supported +3) Configurable driver parameters +4) Troubleshooting + +1) Introduction: +---------------- +This Linux driver supports all Neterion's X3100 series 10 GbE PCIe I/O +Virtualized Server adapters. +The X3100 series supports four modes of operation, configurable via +firmware - + Single function mode + Multi function mode + SRIOV mode + MRIOV mode +The functions share a 10GbE link and the pci-e bus, but hardly anything else +inside the ASIC. Features like independent hw reset, statistics, bandwidth/ +priority allocation and guarantees, GRO, TSO, interrupt moderation etc are +supported independently on each function. + +(See below for a complete list of features supported for both IPv4 and IPv6) + +2) Features supported: +---------------------- + +i) Single function mode (up to 17 queues) + +ii) Multi function mode (up to 17 functions) + +iii) PCI-SIG's I/O Virtualization + - Single Root mode: v1.0 (up to 17 functions) + - Multi-Root mode: v1.0 (up to 17 functions) + +iv) Jumbo frames + X3100 Series supports MTU up to 9600 bytes, modifiable using + ip command. + +v) Offloads supported: (Enabled by default) + Checksum offload (TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit and receive paths + TCP Segmentation Offload (TSO) on transmit path + Generic Receive Offload (GRO) on receive path + +vi) MSI-X: (Enabled by default) + Resulting in noticeable performance improvement (up to 7% on certain + platforms). + +vii) NAPI: (Enabled by default) + For better Rx interrupt moderation. + +viii)RTH (Receive Traffic Hash): (Enabled by default) + Receive side steering for better scaling. + +ix) Statistics + Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed using + "ethtool -S" option. + +x) Multiple hardware queues: (Enabled by default) + Up to 17 hardware based transmit and receive data channels, with + multiple steering options (transmit multiqueue enabled by default). + +3) Configurable driver parameters: +---------------------------------- + +i) max_config_dev + Specifies maximum device functions to be enabled. + Valid range: 1-8 + +ii) max_config_port + Specifies number of ports to be enabled. + Valid range: 1,2 + Default: 1 + +iii)max_config_vpath + Specifies maximum VPATH(s) configured for each device function. + Valid range: 1-17 + +iv) vlan_tag_strip + Enables/disables vlan tag stripping from all received tagged frames that + are not replicated at the internal L2 switch. + Valid range: 0,1 (disabled, enabled respectively) + Default: 1 + +v) addr_learn_en + Enable learning the mac address of the guest OS interface in + virtualization environment. + Valid range: 0,1 (disabled, enabled respectively) + Default: 0 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qla3xxx b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qla3xxx new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2f2077e34d81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qla3xxx @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +Copyright (c) 2003-2006 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux Networking HBA Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be +distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software +Foundation (version 2 or a later version). + +You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file +under the following terms: + + 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), + must retain the above copyright notice, this list of + conditions and the following disclaimer. + + 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above + copyright notice, this list of conditions and the + following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other + materials provided with the distribution. + + 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to + endorse or promote products derived from this software + without specific prior written permission + +REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, +THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY +EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR +BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, +EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED +TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, +DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON +ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, +OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY +OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + +USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT +CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR +OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, +TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN +ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN +COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlcnic b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlcnic new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2ae3b64983ab --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlcnic @@ -0,0 +1,288 @@ +Copyright (c) 2009-2013 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver + +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlge b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlge new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ce64e4d15b21 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qlogic/LICENSE.qlge @@ -0,0 +1,288 @@ +Copyright (c) 2003-2011 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux qlge NIC Driver + +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qualcomm/rmnet.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qualcomm/rmnet.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6b341eaf2062 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/qualcomm/rmnet.txt @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +1. Introduction + +rmnet driver is used for supporting the Multiplexing and aggregation +Protocol (MAP). This protocol is used by all recent chipsets using Qualcomm +Technologies, Inc. modems. + +This driver can be used to register onto any physical network device in +IP mode. Physical transports include USB, HSIC, PCIe and IP accelerator. + +Multiplexing allows for creation of logical netdevices (rmnet devices) to +handle multiple private data networks (PDN) like a default internet, tethering, +multimedia messaging service (MMS) or IP media subsystem (IMS). Hardware sends +packets with MAP headers to rmnet. Based on the multiplexer id, rmnet +routes to the appropriate PDN after removing the MAP header. + +Aggregation is required to achieve high data rates. This involves hardware +sending aggregated bunch of MAP frames. rmnet driver will de-aggregate +these MAP frames and send them to appropriate PDN's. + +2. Packet format + +a. MAP packet (data / control) + +MAP header has the same endianness of the IP packet. + +Packet format - + +Bit 0 1 2-7 8 - 15 16 - 31 +Function Command / Data Reserved Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length +Bit 32 - x +Function Raw Bytes + +Command (1)/ Data (0) bit value is to indicate if the packet is a MAP command +or data packet. Control packet is used for transport level flow control. Data +packets are standard IP packets. + +Reserved bits are usually zeroed out and to be ignored by receiver. + +Padding is number of bytes to be added for 4 byte alignment if required by +hardware. + +Multiplexer ID is to indicate the PDN on which data has to be sent. + +Payload length includes the padding length but does not include MAP header +length. + +b. MAP packet (command specific) + +Bit 0 1 2-7 8 - 15 16 - 31 +Function Command Reserved Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length +Bit 32 - 39 40 - 45 46 - 47 48 - 63 +Function Command name Reserved Command Type Reserved +Bit 64 - 95 +Function Transaction ID +Bit 96 - 127 +Function Command data + +Command 1 indicates disabling flow while 2 is enabling flow + +Command types - +0 for MAP command request +1 is to acknowledge the receipt of a command +2 is for unsupported commands +3 is for error during processing of commands + +c. Aggregation + +Aggregation is multiple MAP packets (can be data or command) delivered to +rmnet in a single linear skb. rmnet will process the individual +packets and either ACK the MAP command or deliver the IP packet to the +network stack as needed + +MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding|MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding.... +MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding|MAP header|Command Packet|Optional pad... + +3. Userspace configuration + +rmnet userspace configuration is done through netlink library librmnetctl +and command line utility rmnetcli. Utility is hosted in codeaurora forum git. +The driver uses rtnl_link_ops for communication. + +https://source.codeaurora.org/quic/la/platform/vendor/qcom-opensource/dataservices/tree/rmnetctl diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/sb1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/sb1000.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f92c2aac56a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/sb1000.txt @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ +sb1000 is a module network device driver for the General Instrument (also known +as NextLevel) SURFboard1000 internal cable modem board. This is an ISA card +which is used by a number of cable TV companies to provide cable modem access. +It's a one-way downstream-only cable modem, meaning that your upstream net link +is provided by your regular phone modem. + +This driver was written by Franco Venturi <fventuri@mediaone.net>. He deserves +a great deal of thanks for this wonderful piece of code! + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Support for this device is now a part of the standard Linux kernel. The +driver source code file is drivers/net/sb1000.c. In addition to this +you will need: + +1.) The "cmconfig" program. This is a utility which supplements "ifconfig" +to configure the cable modem and network interface (usually called "cm0"); +and + +2.) Several PPP scripts which live in /etc/ppp to make connecting via your +cable modem easy. + + These utilities can be obtained from: + + http://www.jacksonville.net/~fventuri/ + + in Franco's original source code distribution .tar.gz file. Support for + the sb1000 driver can be found at: + + http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://home.adelphia.net/~siglercm/sb1000.html + http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://linuxpower.cx/~cable/ + + along with these utilities. + +3.) The standard isapnp tools. These are necessary to configure your SB1000 +card at boot time (or afterwards by hand) since it's a PnP card. + + If you don't have these installed as a standard part of your Linux + distribution, you can find them at: + + http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/ + + or check your Linux distribution binary CD or their web site. For help with + isapnp, pnpdump, or /etc/isapnp.conf, go to: + + http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/isapnpfaq.html + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +To make the SB1000 card work, follow these steps: + +1.) Run `make config', or `make menuconfig', or `make xconfig', whichever +you prefer, in the top kernel tree directory to set up your kernel +configuration. Make sure to say "Y" to "Prompt for development drivers" +and to say "M" to the sb1000 driver. Also say "Y" or "M" to all the standard +networking questions to get TCP/IP and PPP networking support. + +2.) *BEFORE* you build the kernel, edit drivers/net/sb1000.c. Make sure +to redefine the value of READ_DATA_PORT to match the I/O address used +by isapnp to access your PnP cards. This is the value of READPORT in +/etc/isapnp.conf or given by the output of pnpdump. + +3.) Build and install the kernel and modules as usual. + +4.) Boot your new kernel following the usual procedures. + +5.) Set up to configure the new SB1000 PnP card by capturing the output +of "pnpdump" to a file and editing this file to set the correct I/O ports, +IRQ, and DMA settings for all your PnP cards. Make sure none of the settings +conflict with one another. Then test this configuration by running the +"isapnp" command with your new config file as the input. Check for +errors and fix as necessary. (As an aside, I use I/O ports 0x110 and +0x310 and IRQ 11 for my SB1000 card and these work well for me. YMMV.) +Then save the finished config file as /etc/isapnp.conf for proper configuration +on subsequent reboots. + +6.) Download the original file sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz from Franco's site or one of +the others referenced above. As root, unpack it into a temporary directory and +do a `make cmconfig' and then `install -c cmconfig /usr/local/sbin'. Don't do +`make install' because it expects to find all the utilities built and ready for +installation, not just cmconfig. + +7.) As root, copy all the files under the ppp/ subdirectory in Franco's +tar file into /etc/ppp, being careful not to overwrite any files that are +already in there. Then modify ppp@gi-on to set the correct login name, +phone number, and frequency for the cable modem. Also edit pap-secrets +to specify your login name and password and any site-specific information +you need. + +8.) Be sure to modify /etc/ppp/firewall to use ipchains instead of +the older ipfwadm commands from the 2.0.x kernels. There's a neat utility to +convert ipfwadm commands to ipchains commands: + + http://users.dhp.com/~whisper/ipfwadm2ipchains/ + +You may also wish to modify the firewall script to implement a different +firewalling scheme. + +9.) Start the PPP connection via the script /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on. You must be +root to do this. It's better to use a utility like sudo to execute +frequently used commands like this with root permissions if possible. If you +connect successfully the cable modem interface will come up and you'll see a +driver message like this at the console: + + cm0: sb1000 at (0x110,0x310), csn 1, S/N 0x2a0d16d8, IRQ 11. + sb1000.c:v1.1.2 6/01/98 (fventuri@mediaone.net) + +The "ifconfig" command should show two new interfaces, ppp0 and cm0. +The command "cmconfig cm0" will give you information about the cable modem +interface. + +10.) Try pinging a site via `ping -c 5 www.yahoo.com', for example. You should +see packets received. + +11.) If you can't get site names (like www.yahoo.com) to resolve into +IP addresses (like 204.71.200.67), be sure your /etc/resolv.conf file +has no syntax errors and has the right nameserver IP addresses in it. +If this doesn't help, try something like `ping -c 5 204.71.200.67' to +see if the networking is running but the DNS resolution is where the +problem lies. + +12.) If you still have problems, go to the support web sites mentioned above +and read the information and documentation there. + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Common problems: + +1.) Packets go out on the ppp0 interface but don't come back on the cm0 +interface. It looks like I'm connected but I can't even ping any +numerical IP addresses. (This happens predominantly on Debian systems due +to a default boot-time configuration script.) + +Solution -- As root `echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/cm0/rp_filter' so it +can share the same IP address as the ppp0 interface. Note that this +command should probably be added to the /etc/ppp/cablemodem script +*right*between* the "/sbin/ifconfig" and "/sbin/cmconfig" commands. +You may need to do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/ppp0/rp_filter as well. +If you do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/default/rp_filter on each reboot +(in rc.local or some such) then any interfaces can share the same IP +addresses. + +2.) I get "unresolved symbol" error messages on executing `insmod sb1000.o'. + +Solution -- You probably have a non-matching kernel source tree and +/usr/include/linux and /usr/include/asm header files. Make sure you +install the correct versions of the header files in these two directories. +Then rebuild and reinstall the kernel. + +3.) When isapnp runs it reports an error, and my SB1000 card isn't working. + +Solution -- There's a problem with later versions of isapnp using the "(CHECK)" +option in the lines that allocate the two I/O addresses for the SB1000 card. +This first popped up on RH 6.0. Delete "(CHECK)" for the SB1000 I/O addresses. +Make sure they don't conflict with any other pieces of hardware first! Then +rerun isapnp and go from there. + +4.) I can't execute the /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on file. + +Solution -- As root do `chmod ug+x /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on'. + +5.) The firewall script isn't working (with 2.2.x and higher kernels). + +Solution -- Use the ipfwadm2ipchains script referenced above to convert the +/etc/ppp/firewall script from the deprecated ipfwadm commands to ipchains. + +6.) I'm getting *tons* of firewall deny messages in the /var/kern.log, +/var/messages, and/or /var/syslog files, and they're filling up my /var +partition!!! + +Solution -- First, tell your ISP that you're receiving DoS (Denial of Service) +and/or portscanning (UDP connection attempts) attacks! Look over the deny +messages to figure out what the attack is and where it's coming from. Next, +edit /etc/ppp/cablemodem and make sure the ",nobroadcast" option is turned on +to the "cmconfig" command (uncomment that line). If you're not receiving these +denied packets on your broadcast interface (IP address xxx.yyy.zzz.255 +typically), then someone is attacking your machine in particular. Be careful +out there.... + +7.) Everything seems to work fine but my computer locks up after a while +(and typically during a lengthy download through the cable modem)! + +Solution -- You may need to add a short delay in the driver to 'slow down' the +SURFboard because your PC might not be able to keep up with the transfer rate +of the SB1000. To do this, it's probably best to download Franco's +sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz archive and build and install sb1000.o manually. You'll +want to edit the 'Makefile' and look for the 'SB1000_DELAY' +define. Uncomment those 'CFLAGS' lines (and comment out the default ones) +and try setting the delay to something like 60 microseconds with: +'-DSB1000_DELAY=60'. Then do `make' and as root `make install' and try +it out. If it still doesn't work or you like playing with the driver, you may +try other numbers. Remember though that the higher the delay, the slower the +driver (which slows down the rest of the PC too when it is actively +used). Thanks to Ed Daiga for this tip! + +----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Credits: This README came from Franco Venturi's original README file which is +still supplied with his driver .tar.gz archive. I and all other sb1000 users +owe Franco a tremendous "Thank you!" Additional thanks goes to Carl Patten +and Ralph Bonnell who are now managing the Linux SB1000 web site, and to +the SB1000 users who reported and helped debug the common problems listed +above. + + + Clemmitt Sigler + csigler@vt.edu diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/smsc/smc9.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/smsc/smc9.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d1e15074e43d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/smsc/smc9.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + +SMC 9xxxx Driver +Revision 0.12 +3/5/96 +Copyright 1996 Erik Stahlman +Released under terms of the GNU General Public License. + +This file contains the instructions and caveats for my SMC9xxx driver. You +should not be using the driver without reading this file. + +Things to note about installation: + + 1. The driver should work on all kernels from 1.2.13 until 1.3.71. + (A kernel patch is supplied for 1.3.71 ) + + 2. If you include this into the kernel, you might need to change some + options, such as for forcing IRQ. + + + 3. To compile as a module, run 'make' . + Make will give you the appropriate options for various kernel support. + + 4. Loading the driver as a module : + + use: insmod smc9194.o + optional parameters: + io=xxxx : your base address + irq=xx : your irq + ifport=x : 0 for whatever is default + 1 for twisted pair + 2 for AUI ( or BNC on some cards ) + +How to obtain the latest version? + +FTP: + ftp://fenris.campus.vt.edu/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz + ftp://sfbox.vt.edu/filebox/F/fenris/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz + + +Contacting me: + erik@mail.vt.edu + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2bb07078f535 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt @@ -0,0 +1,401 @@ + STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000 Synopsys Ethernet driver + +Copyright (C) 2007-2015 STMicroelectronics Ltd +Author: Giuseppe Cavallaro <peppe.cavallaro@st.com> + +This is the driver for the MAC 10/100/1000 on-chip Ethernet controllers +(Synopsys IP blocks). + +Currently this network device driver is for all STi embedded MAC/GMAC +(i.e. 7xxx/5xxx SoCs), SPEAr (arm), Loongson1B (mips) and XLINX XC2V3000 +FF1152AMT0221 D1215994A VIRTEX FPGA board. + +DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.70a (and older) and DWC Ether +MAC 10/100 Universal version 4.0 have been used for developing this driver. + +This driver supports both the platform bus and PCI. + +Please, for more information also visit: www.stlinux.com + +1) Kernel Configuration +The kernel configuration option is STMMAC_ETH: + Device Drivers ---> Network device support ---> Ethernet (1000 Mbit) ---> + STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000 Ethernet driver (STMMAC_ETH) + +CONFIG_STMMAC_PLATFORM: is to enable the platform driver. +CONFIG_STMMAC_PCI: is to enable the pci driver. + +2) Driver parameters list: + debug: message level (0: no output, 16: all); + phyaddr: to manually provide the physical address to the PHY device; + buf_sz: DMA buffer size; + tc: control the HW FIFO threshold; + watchdog: transmit timeout (in milliseconds); + flow_ctrl: Flow control ability [on/off]; + pause: Flow Control Pause Time; + eee_timer: tx EEE timer; + chain_mode: select chain mode instead of ring. + +3) Command line options +Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using: + stmmaceth=watchdog:100,chain_mode=1 + +4) Driver information and notes + +4.1) Transmit process +The xmit method is invoked when the kernel needs to transmit a packet; it sets +the descriptors in the ring and informs the DMA engine, that there is a packet +ready to be transmitted. +By default, the driver sets the NETIF_F_SG bit in the features field of the +net_device structure, enabling the scatter-gather feature. This is true on +chips and configurations where the checksum can be done in hardware. +Once the controller has finished transmitting the packet, timer will be +scheduled to release the transmit resources. + +4.2) Receive process +When one or more packets are received, an interrupt happens. The interrupts +are not queued, so the driver has to scan all the descriptors in the ring during +the receive process. +This is based on NAPI, so the interrupt handler signals only if there is work +to be done, and it exits. +Then the poll method will be scheduled at some future point. +The incoming packets are stored, by the DMA, in a list of pre-allocated socket +buffers in order to avoid the memcpy (zero-copy). + +4.3) Interrupt mitigation +The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts +using NAPI for the reception on chips older than the 3.50. +New chips have an HW RX-Watchdog used for this mitigation. +Mitigation parameters can be tuned by ethtool. + +4.4) WOL +Wake up on Lan feature through Magic and Unicast frames are supported for the +GMAC core. + +4.5) DMA descriptors +Driver handles both normal and alternate descriptors. The latter has been only +tested on DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a and later. + +STMMAC supports DMA descriptor to operate both in dual buffer (RING) +and linked-list(CHAINED) mode. In RING each descriptor points to two +data buffer pointers whereas in CHAINED mode they point to only one data +buffer pointer. RING mode is the default. + +In CHAINED mode each descriptor will have pointer to next descriptor in +the list, hence creating the explicit chaining in the descriptor itself, +whereas such explicit chaining is not possible in RING mode. + +4.5.1) Extended descriptors +The extended descriptors give us information about the Ethernet payload +when it is carrying PTP packets or TCP/UDP/ICMP over IP. +These are not available on GMAC Synopsys chips older than the 3.50. +At probe time the driver will decide if these can be actually used. +This support also is mandatory for PTPv2 because the extra descriptors +are used for saving the hardware timestamps and Extended Status. + +4.6) Ethtool support +Ethtool is supported. + +For example, driver statistics (including RMON), internal errors can be taken +using: + # ethtool -S ethX +command + +4.7) Jumbo and Segmentation Offloading +Jumbo frames are supported and tested for the GMAC. +The GSO has been also added but it's performed in software. +LRO is not supported. + +4.8) Physical +The driver is compatible with Physical Abstraction Layer to be connected with +PHY and GPHY devices. + +4.9) Platform information +Several information can be passed through the platform and device-tree. + +struct plat_stmmacenet_data { + char *phy_bus_name; + int bus_id; + int phy_addr; + int interface; + struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data *mdio_bus_data; + struct stmmac_dma_cfg *dma_cfg; + int clk_csr; + int has_gmac; + int enh_desc; + int tx_coe; + int rx_coe; + int bugged_jumbo; + int pmt; + int force_sf_dma_mode; + int force_thresh_dma_mode; + int riwt_off; + int max_speed; + int maxmtu; + void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed); + void (*bus_setup)(void __iomem *ioaddr); + int (*init)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv); + void (*exit)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv); + void *bsp_priv; + int has_gmac4; + bool tso_en; +}; + +Where: + o phy_bus_name: phy bus name to attach to the stmmac. + o bus_id: bus identifier. + o phy_addr: the physical address can be passed from the platform. + If it is set to -1 the driver will automatically + detect it at run-time by probing all the 32 addresses. + o interface: PHY device's interface. + o mdio_bus_data: specific platform fields for the MDIO bus. + o dma_cfg: internal DMA parameters + o pbl: the Programmable Burst Length is maximum number of beats to + be transferred in one DMA transaction. + GMAC also enables the 4xPBL by default. (8xPBL for GMAC 3.50 and newer) + o txpbl/rxpbl: GMAC and newer supports independent DMA pbl for tx/rx. + o pblx8: Enable 8xPBL (4xPBL for core rev < 3.50). Enabled by default. + o fixed_burst/mixed_burst/aal + o clk_csr: fixed CSR Clock range selection. + o has_gmac: uses the GMAC core. + o enh_desc: if sets the MAC will use the enhanced descriptor structure. + o tx_coe: core is able to perform the tx csum in HW. + o rx_coe: the supports three check sum offloading engine types: + type_1, type_2 (full csum) and no RX coe. + o bugged_jumbo: some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for + over-sized frames due to limited buffer sizes. + Setting this flag the csum will be done in SW on + JUMBO frames. + o pmt: core has the embedded power module (optional). + o force_sf_dma_mode: force DMA to use the Store and Forward mode + instead of the Threshold. + o force_thresh_dma_mode: force DMA to use the Threshold mode other than + the Store and Forward mode. + o riwt_off: force to disable the RX watchdog feature and switch to NAPI mode. + o fix_mac_speed: this callback is used for modifying some syscfg registers + (on ST SoCs) according to the link speed negotiated by the + physical layer . + o bus_setup: perform HW setup of the bus. For example, on some ST platforms + this field is used to configure the AMBA bridge to generate more + efficient STBus traffic. + o init/exit: callbacks used for calling a custom initialization; + this is sometime necessary on some platforms (e.g. ST boxes) + where the HW needs to have set some PIO lines or system cfg + registers. init/exit callbacks should not use or modify + platform data. + o bsp_priv: another private pointer. + o has_gmac4: uses GMAC4 core. + o tso_en: Enables TSO (TCP Segmentation Offload) feature. + +For MDIO bus The we have: + + struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data { + int (*phy_reset)(void *priv); + unsigned int phy_mask; + int *irqs; + int probed_phy_irq; + }; + +Where: + o phy_reset: hook to reset the phy device attached to the bus. + o phy_mask: phy mask passed when register the MDIO bus within the driver. + o irqs: list of IRQs, one per PHY. + o probed_phy_irq: if irqs is NULL, use this for probed PHY. + +For DMA engine we have the following internal fields that should be +tuned according to the HW capabilities. + +struct stmmac_dma_cfg { + int pbl; + int txpbl; + int rxpbl; + bool pblx8; + int fixed_burst; + int mixed_burst; + bool aal; +}; + +Where: + o pbl: Programmable Burst Length (tx and rx) + o txpbl: Transmit Programmable Burst Length. Only for GMAC and newer. + If set, DMA tx will use this value rather than pbl. + o rxpbl: Receive Programmable Burst Length. Only for GMAC and newer. + If set, DMA rx will use this value rather than pbl. + o pblx8: Enable 8xPBL (4xPBL for core rev < 3.50). Enabled by default. + o fixed_burst: program the DMA to use the fixed burst mode + o mixed_burst: program the DMA to use the mixed burst mode + o aal: Address-Aligned Beats + +--- + +Below an example how the structures above are using on ST platforms. + + static struct plat_stmmacenet_data stxYYY_ethernet_platform_data = { + .has_gmac = 0, + .enh_desc = 0, + .fix_mac_speed = stxYYY_ethernet_fix_mac_speed, + | + |-> to write an internal syscfg + | on this platform when the + | link speed changes from 10 to + | 100 and viceversa + .init = &stmmac_claim_resource, + | + |-> On ST SoC this calls own "PAD" + | manager framework to claim + | all the resources necessary + | (GPIO ...). The .custom_cfg field + | is used to pass a custom config. +}; + +Below the usage of the stmmac_mdio_bus_data: on this SoC, in fact, +there are two MAC cores: one MAC is for MDIO Bus/PHY emulation +with fixed_link support. + +static struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data stmmac1_mdio_bus = { + .phy_reset = phy_reset; + | + |-> function to provide the phy_reset on this board + .phy_mask = 0, +}; + +static struct fixed_phy_status stmmac0_fixed_phy_status = { + .link = 1, + .speed = 100, + .duplex = 1, +}; + +During the board's device_init we can configure the first +MAC for fixed_link by calling: + fixed_phy_add(PHY_POLL, 1, &stmmac0_fixed_phy_status, -1); +and the second one, with a real PHY device attached to the bus, +by using the stmmac_mdio_bus_data structure (to provide the id, the +reset procedure etc). + +Note that, starting from new chips, where it is available the HW capability +register, many configurations are discovered at run-time for example to +understand if EEE, HW csum, PTP, enhanced descriptor etc are actually +available. As strategy adopted in this driver, the information from the HW +capability register can replace what has been passed from the platform. + +4.10) Device-tree support. + +Please see the following document: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt + +4.11) This is a summary of the content of some relevant files: + o stmmac_main.c: implements the main network device driver; + o stmmac_mdio.c: provides MDIO functions; + o stmmac_pci: this is the PCI driver; + o stmmac_platform.c: this the platform driver (OF supported); + o stmmac_ethtool.c: implements the ethtool support; + o stmmac.h: private driver structure; + o common.h: common definitions and VFTs; + o mmc_core.c/mmc.h: Management MAC Counters; + o stmmac_hwtstamp.c: HW timestamp support for PTP; + o stmmac_ptp.c: PTP 1588 clock; + o stmmac_pcs.h: Physical Coding Sublayer common implementation; + o dwmac-<XXX>.c: these are for the platform glue-logic file; e.g. dwmac-sti.c + for STMicroelectronics SoCs. + +- GMAC 3.x + o descs.h: descriptor structure definitions; + o dwmac1000_core.c: dwmac GiGa core functions; + o dwmac1000_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC chip; + o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the dwmac GiGa; + o dwmac100_core: dwmac 100 core code; + o dwmac100_dma.c: dma functions for the dwmac 100 chip; + o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the MAC; + o dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions; + o enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors; + o norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors; + o chain_mode.c/ring_mode.c:: functions to manage RING/CHAINED modes; + +- GMAC4.x generation + o dwmac4_core.c: dwmac GMAC4.x core functions; + o dwmac4_desc.c: functions for handling GMAC4.x descriptors; + o dwmac4_descs.h: descriptor definitions; + o dwmac4_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC4.x chip; + o dwmac4_dma.h: dma definitions for the GMAC4.x chip; + o dwmac4.h: core definitions for the GMAC4.x chip; + o dwmac4_lib.c: generic GMAC4.x functions; + +4.12) TSO support (GMAC4.x) + +TSO (Tcp Segmentation Offload) feature is supported by GMAC 4.x chip family. +When a packet is sent through TCP protocol, the TCP stack ensures that +the SKB provided to the low level driver (stmmac in our case) matches with +the maximum frame len (IP header + TCP header + payload <= 1500 bytes (for +MTU set to 1500)). It means that if an application using TCP want to send a +packet which will have a length (after adding headers) > 1514 the packet +will be split in several TCP packets: The data payload is split and headers +(TCP/IP ..) are added. It is done by software. + +When TSO is enabled, the TCP stack doesn't care about the maximum frame +length and provide SKB packet to stmmac as it is. The GMAC IP will have to +perform the segmentation by it self to match with maximum frame length. + +This feature can be enabled in device tree through "snps,tso" entry. + +5) Debug Information + +The driver exports many information i.e. internal statistics, +debug information, MAC and DMA registers etc. + +These can be read in several ways depending on the +type of the information actually needed. + +For example a user can be use the ethtool support +to get statistics: e.g. using: ethtool -S ethX +(that shows the Management counters (MMC) if supported) +or sees the MAC/DMA registers: e.g. using: ethtool -d ethX + +Compiling the Kernel with CONFIG_DEBUG_FS the driver will export the following +debugfs entries: + +/sys/kernel/debug/stmmaceth/descriptors_status + To show the DMA TX/RX descriptor rings + +Developer can also use the "debug" module parameter to get further debug +information (please see: NETIF Msg Level). + +6) Energy Efficient Ethernet + +Energy Efficient Ethernet(EEE) enables IEEE 802.3 MAC sublayer along +with a family of Physical layer to operate in the Low power Idle(LPI) +mode. The EEE mode supports the IEEE 802.3 MAC operation at 100Mbps, +1000Mbps & 10Gbps. + +The LPI mode allows power saving by switching off parts of the +communication device functionality when there is no data to be +transmitted & received. The system on both the side of the link can +disable some functionalities & save power during the period of low-link +utilization. The MAC controls whether the system should enter or exit +the LPI mode & communicate this to PHY. + +As soon as the interface is opened, the driver verifies if the EEE can +be supported. This is done by looking at both the DMA HW capability +register and the PHY devices MCD registers. +To enter in Tx LPI mode the driver needs to have a software timer +that enable and disable the LPI mode when there is nothing to be +transmitted. + +7) Precision Time Protocol (PTP) +The driver supports the IEEE 1588-2002, Precision Time Protocol (PTP), +which enables precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and +control systems implemented with technologies such as network +communication. + +In addition to the basic timestamp features mentioned in IEEE 1588-2002 +Timestamps, new GMAC cores support the advanced timestamp features. +IEEE 1588-2008 that can be enabled when configure the Kernel. + +8) SGMII/RGMII support +New GMAC devices provide own way to manage RGMII/SGMII. +This information is available at run-time by looking at the +HW capability register. This means that the stmmac can manage +auto-negotiation and link status w/o using the PHYLIB stuff. +In fact, the HW provides a subset of extended registers to +restart the ANE, verify Full/Half duplex mode and Speed. +Thanks to these registers, it is possible to look at the +Auto-negotiated Link Parter Ability. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d4d4c0751a09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw.txt @@ -0,0 +1,541 @@ +* Texas Instruments CPSW ethernet driver + +Multiqueue & CBS & MQPRIO +===================================================================== +===================================================================== + +The cpsw has 3 CBS shapers for each external ports. This document +describes MQPRIO and CBS Qdisc offload configuration for cpsw driver +based on examples. It potentially can be used in audio video bridging +(AVB) and time sensitive networking (TSN). + +The following examples were tested on AM572x EVM and BBB boards. + +Test setup +========== + +Under consideration two examples with AM572x EVM running cpsw driver +in dual_emac mode. + +Several prerequisites: +- TX queues must be rated starting from txq0 that has highest priority +- Traffic classes are used starting from 0, that has highest priority +- CBS shapers should be used with rated queues +- The bandwidth for CBS shapers has to be set a little bit more then + potential incoming rate, thus, rate of all incoming tx queues has + to be a little less +- Real rates can differ, due to discreetness +- Map skb-priority to txq is not enough, also skb-priority to l2 prio + map has to be created with ip or vconfig tool +- Any l2/socket prio (0 - 7) for classes can be used, but for + simplicity default values are used: 3 and 2 +- only 2 classes tested: A and B, but checked and can work with more, + maximum allowed 4, but only for 3 rate can be set. + +Test setup for examples +======================= + +-------------------------------+ + |--+ | + | | Workstation0 | + |E | MAC 18:03:73:66:87:42 | ++-----------------------------+ +--|t | | +| | 1 | E | | |h |./tsn_listener -d \ | +| Target board: | 0 | t |--+ |0 | 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0 \| +| AM572x EVM | 0 | h | | | -s 1500 | +| | 0 | 0 | |--+ | +| Only 2 classes: |Mb +---| +-------------------------------+ +| class A, class B | | +| | +---| +-------------------------------+ +| | 1 | E | |--+ | +| | 0 | t | | | Workstation1 | +| | 0 | h |--+ |E | MAC 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd | +| |Mb | 1 | +--|t | | ++-----------------------------+ |h |./tsn_listener -d \ | + |0 | 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth0 \| + | | -s 1500 | + |--+ | + +-------------------------------+ + +********************************************************************* +********************************************************************* +********************************************************************* +Example 1: One port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, applicable for single port boards) + +tc - traffic class +txq - transmit queue +p - priority +f - fifo (cpsw fifo) +S - shaper configured + ++------------------------------------------------------------------+ u +| +---------------+ +---------------+ +------+ +------+ | s +| | | | | | | | | | e +| | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | Apps | | r +| | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Rest | | +| | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth1 | | s +| | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | | | | p +| | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | | | | a +| | SO_PRIORITY=3 | | SO_PRIORITY=2 | | | | | | | | c +| | | | | | | | | | | | | | e +| +---|-----------+ +---|-----------+ +---|--+ +---|--+ | ++-----|------------------|------------------|--------|-------------+ + +-+ +------------+ | | + | | +-----------------+ +--+ + | | | | ++---|-------|-------------|-----------------------|----------------+ +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | k +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n +| | | | | | e +| | | +-----+ | | l +| | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s +| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc0 | | p +| \ / \ / \ / \ / | a +| \ / \ / \ / \ / | c +| \/ \/ \/ \/ | e +| | | +-----+ | | +| | | | | | | +| | | | | | | +| | | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| |txq0| |txq1| |txq2| |txq3| |txq4| | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | +| +-|------|------|------|--+ +--|--------------+ | +| | | | | | | Eth0.100 | | Eth1 | | ++---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+ + | | | | | + p p p p | + 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <- L2 priority | + | | | | | + | | | | | ++---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+ +| | | | | |----------+ | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| |dma7| |dma6| |dma5| |dma4| |dma3| | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c +| \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / | p +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s +| | | | +----- | | w +| | | | | | | +| | | | | | | d +| +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ | r +| | | | | | |o o| | | i +| | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r r| f0 | | v +| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | | e +| \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / | r +| \S / \S / \ / \ / | +| \/ \/ \/ \/ | ++------------------------------------------------------------------+ +========================================Eth==========================> + +1) +// Add 4 tx queues, for interface Eth0, and 1 tx queue for Eth1 +$ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 5 +rx unmodified, ignoring + +2) +// Check if num of queues is set correctly: +$ ethtool -l eth0 +Channel parameters for eth0: +Pre-set maximums: +RX: 8 +TX: 8 +Other: 0 +Combined: 0 +Current hardware settings: +RX: 1 +TX: 5 +Other: 0 +Combined: 0 + +3) +// TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 +// Set rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately. +// Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness. +// Leave last 2 tx queues not rated. +$ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate +$ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate + +4) +// Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues: +$ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate +40 +20 +0 +0 +0 + +5) +// Map skb->priority to traffic class: +// 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 +// Map traffic class to transmit queue: +// tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq2, txq3) +$ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ +map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@2 hw 1 + +5a) +// As two interface sharing same set of tx queues, assign all traffic +// coming to interface Eth1 to separate queue in order to not mix it +// with traffic from interface Eth0, so use separate txq to send +// packets to Eth1, so all prio -> tc0 and tc0 -> txq4 +// Here hw 0, so here still default configuration for eth1 in hw +$ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 1 \ +map 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 queues 1@4 hw 0 + +6) +// Check classes settings +$ tc -g class show dev eth0 ++---(100:ffe2) mqprio +| +---(100:3) mqprio +| +---(100:4) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe1) mqprio +| +---(100:2) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:1) mqprio + +$ tc -g class show dev eth1 ++---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:5) mqprio + +7) +// Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc +// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) +// here only idle slope is important, others arg are ignored +// Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness +$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1438 \ +hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1 +net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50 + +8) +// Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc: +// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) +$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1468 \ +hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1 +net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30 + +9) +// Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos +$ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100 +8021q: 802.1Q VLAN Support v1.8 +8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth0 +8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth1 +net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter + +10) +// Map skb->priority to L2 prio, 1 to 1 +$ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \ +egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +11) +// Check egress map for vlan 100 +$ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100 +[...] +INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 +EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +12) +// Run your appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" +// to 3 for class A and/or to 2 for class B +// (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) +./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500& +./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500& + +13) +// run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan) +// (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) +./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500 +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps + +14) +// Restore default configuration if needed +$ ip link del eth0.100 +$ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root +$ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root +net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped +net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0 +net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0 +$ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1 + +********************************************************************* +********************************************************************* +********************************************************************* +Example 2: Two port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, for dual emac boards only) + ++------------------------------------------------------------------+ u +| +----------+ +----------+ +------+ +----------+ +----------+ | s +| | | | | | | | | | | | e +| | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | App 3 | | App 4 | | r +| | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Class B | | Class A | | +| | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | | | | Eth1 | | Eth1 | | s +| | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | p +| | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | 10 Mb/s | | 30 Mb/s | | a +| | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | | | | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | c +| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e +| +---|------+ +---|------+ +---|--+ +---|------+ +---|------+ | ++-----|-------------|-------------|---------|-------------|--------+ + +-+ +-------+ | +----------+ +----+ + | | +-------+------+ | | + | | | | | | ++---|-------|-------------|--------------|-------------|-------|---+ +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | p1 | | p2 | | p3 | | k +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n +| | | | | | | | e +| | | +----+ +----+ | | | l +| | | | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s +| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc2 | |tc1 | |tc0 | | p +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | a +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | e +| | | +-----+ +-----+ | | | +| | | | | | | | | | +| | | | | | | | | | +| | | | | E E | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ t t +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| |txq0| |txq1| |txq4| |txq5| h h |txq6| |txq7| |txq3| |txq2| | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / 0 1 \ / \ / \ / \ / | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / . . \ / \ / \ / \ / | +| \/ \/ \/ \/ 1 1 \/ \/ \/ \/ | +| +-|------|------|------|--+ 0 0 +-|------|------|------|--+ | +| | | | | | | 0 0 | | | | | | | ++---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+ + | | | | | | | | + p p p p p p p p + 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <-L2 pri-> 0-1, 4-7 2 3 + | | | | | | | | + | | | | | | | | ++---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+ +| | | | | | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| |dma7| |dma6| |dma3| |dma2| |dma1| |dma0| |dma4| |dma5| | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c +| \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / \ / \S / \S / | p +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s +| | | | +----- | | | | | w +| | | | | +----+ | | | | +| | | | | | | | | | d +| +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ +----+ +----+ | r +| | | | | | |o o| | | | | | | i +| | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r CPSW r| f3 | | f2 | | f0 | | v +| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | | e +| \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / \CBS / \CBS / | r +| \S / \S / \ / \S / \S / \ / | +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | ++------------------------------------------------------------------+ +========================================Eth==========================> + +1) +// Add 8 tx queues, for interface Eth0, but they are common, so are accessed +// by two interfaces Eth0 and Eth1. +$ ethtool -L eth1 rx 1 tx 8 +rx unmodified, ignoring + +2) +// Check if num of queues is set correctly: +$ ethtool -l eth0 +Channel parameters for eth0: +Pre-set maximums: +RX: 8 +TX: 8 +Other: 0 +Combined: 0 +Current hardware settings: +RX: 1 +TX: 8 +Other: 0 +Combined: 0 + +3) +// TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 for Eth0 +// and for tx2 and tx3 for Eth1. That is, rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately +// for Eth0 and 30 and 10 Mb/s for Eth1. +// Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness +// Leave last 4 tx queues as not rated +$ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate +$ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate +$ echo 30 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-2/tx_maxrate +$ echo 10 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-3/tx_maxrate + +4) +// Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues: +$ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate +40 +20 +30 +10 +0 +0 +0 +0 + +5) +// Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth0: +// 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 +// Map traffic class to transmit queue: +// tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq4, txq5) +$ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ +map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@4 hw 1 + +6) +// Check classes settings +$ tc -g class show dev eth0 ++---(100:ffe2) mqprio +| +---(100:5) mqprio +| +---(100:6) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe1) mqprio +| +---(100:2) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:1) mqprio + +7) +// Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0 +// here only idle slope is important, others ignored +// Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness +$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1470 \ +hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1 +net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50 + +8) +// Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0 +$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1470 \ +hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1 +net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30 + +9) +// Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth0 +$ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100 +net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter + +10) +// Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth0.100, one to one +$ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \ +egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +11) +// Check egress map for vlan 100 +$ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100 +[...] +INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 +EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +12) +// Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth1: +// 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 +// Map traffic class to transmit queue: +// tc0 -> txq2, tc1 -> txq3, tc2 -> (txq6, txq7) +$ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ +map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@2 1@3 2@6 hw 1 + +13) +// Check classes settings +$ tc -g class show dev eth1 ++---(100:ffe2) mqprio +| +---(100:7) mqprio +| +---(100:8) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe1) mqprio +| +---(100:4) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:3) mqprio + +14) +// Set rate for class A - 31 Mbit (tc0, txq2) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1 +// here only idle slope is important, others ignored, but calculated +// for interface speed - 100Mb for eth1 port. +// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) +$ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:3 cbs locredit -1035 \ +hicredit 465 sendslope -69000 idleslope 31000 offload 1 +net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 31 + +15) +// Set rate for class B - 11 Mbit (tc1, txq3) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1 +// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) +$ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:4 cbs locredit -1335 \ +hicredit 405 sendslope -89000 idleslope 11000 offload 1 +net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 11 + +16) +// Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth1 +$ ip link add link eth1 name eth1.100 type vlan id 100 +net eth1: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter + +17) +// Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth1.100, one to one +$ ip link set eth1.100 type vlan \ +egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +18) +// Check egress map for vlan 100 +$ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth1.100 +[...] +INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 +EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +19) +// Run appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" to 3 +// for class A and to 2 for class B. For both interfaces +./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500& +./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500& +./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p2 -s 1500& +./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p3 -s 1500& + +20) +// run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan) +// (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) +./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500 +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps + +21) +// Restore default configuration if needed +$ ip link del eth1.100 +$ ip link del eth0.100 +$ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root +net eth1: Prev FIFO2 is shaped +net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 0 +net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 0 +$ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root +net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped +net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0 +net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0 +$ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/tlan.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/tlan.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..34550dfcef74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/tlan.txt @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +(C) 1997-1998 Caldera, Inc. +(C) 1998 James Banks +(C) 1999-2001 Torben Mathiasen <tmm@image.dk, torben.mathiasen@compaq.com> + +For driver information/updates visit http://www.compaq.com + + +TLAN driver for Linux, version 1.14a +README + + +I. Supported Devices. + + Only PCI devices will work with this driver. + + Supported: + Vendor ID Device ID Name + 0e11 ae32 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX PCI UTP + 0e11 ae34 Compaq Netelligent 10 T PCI UTP + 0e11 ae35 Compaq Integrated NetFlex 3/P + 0e11 ae40 Compaq Netelligent Dual 10/100 TX PCI UTP + 0e11 ae43 Compaq Netelligent Integrated 10/100 TX UTP + 0e11 b011 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX Embedded UTP + 0e11 b012 Compaq Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax + 0e11 b030 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX UTP + 0e11 f130 Compaq NetFlex 3/P + 0e11 f150 Compaq NetFlex 3/P + 108d 0012 Olicom OC-2325 + 108d 0013 Olicom OC-2183 + 108d 0014 Olicom OC-2326 + + + Caveats: + + I am not sure if 100BaseTX daughterboards (for those cards which + support such things) will work. I haven't had any solid evidence + either way. + + However, if a card supports 100BaseTx without requiring an add + on daughterboard, it should work with 100BaseTx. + + The "Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax" (b012) device is untested, + but I do not expect any problems. + + +II. Driver Options + 1. You can append debug=x to the end of the insmod line to get + debug messages, where x is a bit field where the bits mean + the following: + + 0x01 Turn on general debugging messages. + 0x02 Turn on receive debugging messages. + 0x04 Turn on transmit debugging messages. + 0x08 Turn on list debugging messages. + + 2. You can append aui=1 to the end of the insmod line to cause + the adapter to use the AUI interface instead of the 10 Base T + interface. This is also what to do if you want to use the BNC + connector on a TLAN based device. (Setting this option on a + device that does not have an AUI/BNC connector will probably + cause it to not function correctly.) + + 3. You can set duplex=1 to force half duplex, and duplex=2 to + force full duplex. + + 4. You can set speed=10 to force 10Mbs operation, and speed=100 + to force 100Mbs operation. (I'm not sure what will happen + if a card which only supports 10Mbs is forced into 100Mbs + mode.) + + 5. You have to use speed=X duplex=Y together now. If you just + do "insmod tlan.o speed=100" the driver will do Auto-Neg. + To force a 10Mbps Half-Duplex link do "insmod tlan.o speed=10 + duplex=1". + + 6. If the driver is built into the kernel, you can use the 3rd + and 4th parameters to set aui and debug respectively. For + example: + + ether=0,0,0x1,0x7,eth0 + + This sets aui to 0x1 and debug to 0x7, assuming eth0 is a + supported TLAN device. + + The bits in the third byte are assigned as follows: + + 0x01 = aui + 0x02 = use half duplex + 0x04 = use full duplex + 0x08 = use 10BaseT + 0x10 = use 100BaseTx + + You also need to set both speed and duplex settings when forcing + speeds with kernel-parameters. + ether=0,0,0x12,0,eth0 will force link to 100Mbps Half-Duplex. + + 7. If you have more than one tlan adapter in your system, you can + use the above options on a per adapter basis. To force a 100Mbit/HD + link with your eth1 adapter use: + + insmod tlan speed=0,100 duplex=0,1 + + Now eth0 will use auto-neg and eth1 will be forced to 100Mbit/HD. + Note that the tlan driver supports a maximum of 8 adapters. + + +III. Things to try if you have problems. + 1. Make sure your card's PCI id is among those listed in + section I, above. + 2. Make sure routing is correct. + 3. Try forcing different speed/duplex settings + + +There is also a tlan mailing list which you can join by sending "subscribe tlan" +in the body of an email to majordomo@vuser.vu.union.edu. +There is also a tlan website at http://www.compaq.com + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/toshiba/spider_net.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/toshiba/spider_net.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b0b75f8463b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/toshiba/spider_net.txt @@ -0,0 +1,204 @@ + + The Spidernet Device Driver + =========================== + +Written by Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com> + +Version of 7 June 2007 + +Abstract +======== +This document sketches the structure of portions of the spidernet +device driver in the Linux kernel tree. The spidernet is a gigabit +ethernet device built into the Toshiba southbridge commonly used +in the SONY Playstation 3 and the IBM QS20 Cell blade. + +The Structure of the RX Ring. +============================= +The receive (RX) ring is a circular linked list of RX descriptors, +together with three pointers into the ring that are used to manage its +contents. + +The elements of the ring are called "descriptors" or "descrs"; they +describe the received data. This includes a pointer to a buffer +containing the received data, the buffer size, and various status bits. + +There are three primary states that a descriptor can be in: "empty", +"full" and "not-in-use". An "empty" or "ready" descriptor is ready +to receive data from the hardware. A "full" descriptor has data in it, +and is waiting to be emptied and processed by the OS. A "not-in-use" +descriptor is neither empty or full; it is simply not ready. It may +not even have a data buffer in it, or is otherwise unusable. + +During normal operation, on device startup, the OS (specifically, the +spidernet device driver) allocates a set of RX descriptors and RX +buffers. These are all marked "empty", ready to receive data. This +ring is handed off to the hardware, which sequentially fills in the +buffers, and marks them "full". The OS follows up, taking the full +buffers, processing them, and re-marking them empty. + +This filling and emptying is managed by three pointers, the "head" +and "tail" pointers, managed by the OS, and a hardware current +descriptor pointer (GDACTDPA). The GDACTDPA points at the descr +currently being filled. When this descr is filled, the hardware +marks it full, and advances the GDACTDPA by one. Thus, when there is +flowing RX traffic, every descr behind it should be marked "full", +and everything in front of it should be "empty". If the hardware +discovers that the current descr is not empty, it will signal an +interrupt, and halt processing. + +The tail pointer tails or trails the hardware pointer. When the +hardware is ahead, the tail pointer will be pointing at a "full" +descr. The OS will process this descr, and then mark it "not-in-use", +and advance the tail pointer. Thus, when there is flowing RX traffic, +all of the descrs in front of the tail pointer should be "full", and +all of those behind it should be "not-in-use". When RX traffic is not +flowing, then the tail pointer can catch up to the hardware pointer. +The OS will then note that the current tail is "empty", and halt +processing. + +The head pointer (somewhat mis-named) follows after the tail pointer. +When traffic is flowing, then the head pointer will be pointing at +a "not-in-use" descr. The OS will perform various housekeeping duties +on this descr. This includes allocating a new data buffer and +dma-mapping it so as to make it visible to the hardware. The OS will +then mark the descr as "empty", ready to receive data. Thus, when there +is flowing RX traffic, everything in front of the head pointer should +be "not-in-use", and everything behind it should be "empty". If no +RX traffic is flowing, then the head pointer can catch up to the tail +pointer, at which point the OS will notice that the head descr is +"empty", and it will halt processing. + +Thus, in an idle system, the GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers will +all be pointing at the same descr, which should be "empty". All of the +other descrs in the ring should be "empty" as well. + +The show_rx_chain() routine will print out the locations of the +GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers. It will also summarize the contents +of the ring, starting at the tail pointer, and listing the status +of the descrs that follow. + +A typical example of the output, for a nearly idle system, might be + +net eth1: Total number of descrs=256 +net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=20 +net eth1: Chain head is at 20 +net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 21 +net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800101 +net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 22 +net eth1: Last 255 descrs with stat=xa0800000 + +In the above, the hardware has filled in one descr, number 20. Both +head and tail are pointing at 20, because it has not yet been emptied. +Meanwhile, hw is pointing at 21, which is free. + +The "Have nnn decrs" refers to the descr starting at the tail: in this +case, nnn=1 descr, starting at descr 20. The "Last nnn descrs" refers +to all of the rest of the descrs, from the last status change. The "nnn" +is a count of how many descrs have exactly the same status. + +The status x4... corresponds to "full" and status xa... corresponds +to "empty". The actual value printed is RXCOMST_A. + +In the device driver source code, a different set of names are +used for these same concepts, so that + +"empty" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_CARDOWNED == 0xa +"full" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_FRAME_END == 0x4 +"not in use" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_NOT_IN_USE == 0xf + + +The RX RAM full bug/feature +=========================== + +As long as the OS can empty out the RX buffers at a rate faster than +the hardware can fill them, there is no problem. If, for some reason, +the OS fails to empty the RX ring fast enough, the hardware GDACTDPA +pointer will catch up to the head, notice the not-empty condition, +ad stop. However, RX packets may still continue arriving on the wire. +The spidernet chip can save some limited number of these in local RAM. +When this local ram fills up, the spider chip will issue an interrupt +indicating this (GHIINT0STS will show ERRINT, and the GRMFLLINT bit +will be set in GHIINT1STS). When the RX ram full condition occurs, +a certain bug/feature is triggered that has to be specially handled. +This section describes the special handling for this condition. + +When the OS finally has a chance to run, it will empty out the RX ring. +In particular, it will clear the descriptor on which the hardware had +stopped. However, once the hardware has decided that a certain +descriptor is invalid, it will not restart at that descriptor; instead +it will restart at the next descr. This potentially will lead to a +deadlock condition, as the tail pointer will be pointing at this descr, +which, from the OS point of view, is empty; the OS will be waiting for +this descr to be filled. However, the hardware has skipped this descr, +and is filling the next descrs. Since the OS doesn't see this, there +is a potential deadlock, with the OS waiting for one descr to fill, +while the hardware is waiting for a different set of descrs to become +empty. + +A call to show_rx_chain() at this point indicates the nature of the +problem. A typical print when the network is hung shows the following: + +net eth1: Spider RX RAM full, incoming packets might be discarded! +net eth1: Total number of descrs=256 +net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=255 +net eth1: Chain head is at 255 +net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 0 +net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000 +net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 1 +net eth1: Have 127 descrs with stat=x40800101 +net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800001 +net eth1: Have 126 descrs with stat=x40800101 +net eth1: Last 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000 + +Both the tail and head pointers are pointing at descr 255, which is +marked xa... which is "empty". Thus, from the OS point of view, there +is nothing to be done. In particular, there is the implicit assumption +that everything in front of the "empty" descr must surely also be empty, +as explained in the last section. The OS is waiting for descr 255 to +become non-empty, which, in this case, will never happen. + +The HW pointer is at descr 0. This descr is marked 0x4.. or "full". +Since its already full, the hardware can do nothing more, and thus has +halted processing. Notice that descrs 0 through 254 are all marked +"full", while descr 254 and 255 are empty. (The "Last 1 descrs" is +descr 254, since tail was at 255.) Thus, the system is deadlocked, +and there can be no forward progress; the OS thinks there's nothing +to do, and the hardware has nowhere to put incoming data. + +This bug/feature is worked around with the spider_net_resync_head_ptr() +routine. When the driver receives RX interrupts, but an examination +of the RX chain seems to show it is empty, then it is probable that +the hardware has skipped a descr or two (sometimes dozens under heavy +network conditions). The spider_net_resync_head_ptr() subroutine will +search the ring for the next full descr, and the driver will resume +operations there. Since this will leave "holes" in the ring, there +is also a spider_net_resync_tail_ptr() that will skip over such holes. + +As of this writing, the spider_net_resync() strategy seems to work very +well, even under heavy network loads. + + +The TX ring +=========== +The TX ring uses a low-watermark interrupt scheme to make sure that +the TX queue is appropriately serviced for large packet sizes. + +For packet sizes greater than about 1KBytes, the kernel can fill +the TX ring quicker than the device can drain it. Once the ring +is full, the netdev is stopped. When there is room in the ring, +the netdev needs to be reawakened, so that more TX packets are placed +in the ring. The hardware can empty the ring about four times per jiffy, +so its not appropriate to wait for the poll routine to refill, since +the poll routine runs only once per jiffy. The low-watermark mechanism +marks a descr about 1/4th of the way from the bottom of the queue, so +that an interrupt is generated when the descr is processed. This +interrupt wakes up the netdev, which can then refill the queue. +For large packets, this mechanism generates a relatively small number +of interrupts, about 1K/sec. For smaller packets, this will drop to zero +interrupts, as the hardware can empty the queue faster than the kernel +can fill it. + + + ======= END OF DOCUMENT ======== + |